JP7078102B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

As a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed and a display device is performed based on the fact that a gaming ball launched by a player operating a launching device or the like enters a ball entry portion provided in a gaming area. A variable display of the pattern is performed on the display screen of, and if a winning result is obtained in the lottery, a combination of specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and a special gaming state advantageous for the player. There is a known configuration that shifts to (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-074175

In such a gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing the degree of attention to the gaming.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably increasing the degree of attention of a game.

The present invention
A launching means that launches a game ball toward the game area by being operated by the player,
An entry part where a game ball launched by the launching means and flowing down the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a game ball enters the ball entry portion, and
An acquisition information storage means that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number, which is predetermined.
For each special information stored in the acquired information storage means, a grant determination is sequentially made as to whether or not the grant correspondence result corresponds to the granting of the first privilege to the player, and the determination result is the grant correspondence. If it is the result, the privilege granting means for granting the first privilege and the privilege granting means
In a gaming machine equipped with
A means for counting the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion ,
By operating the launching means in a specific manner in which the ball can enter the ball entry portion regardless of the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the first privilege is different from the first privilege. 2 The first means that can execute the first notification that the privilege can be granted, and
When the ball enters the ball entry portion due to the operation of the launching means in the specific mode, the case where the operation of the launching means which is the specific mode is not continued is better than the case where the operation is continued. A second means capable of performing a second notification that the situation can be advantageous,
Equipped with
The second means can execute the second notification when a ball enters the ball entry portion in a situation where the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the predetermined number. It is characterized by.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably increasing the degree of attention of a gaming machine.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main structure of a pachinko machine by disassembling. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is a schematic diagram of (a) the operating port in the closed state, and (b) is the schematic diagram of the operating port in the open state. (A), (b) is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a)-(e) special accessory. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the pass / fail table for special drawing, and (b)-(d) explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table for special drawing. (A), (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a variation display time table for a special figure, and (c) to (e) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a variation display time table for a general figure. (A) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal figure winning / failing distribution table referred to in the low frequency support mode, and (b) it is an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal figure winning / failing distribution table referred to in the high frequency support mode. be. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fuden control process. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the hold information on the ordinary drawing side. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during a change of a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the processing in the process of confirming a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the hold information on the special figure side. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric termination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect determination process executed by a sound light control device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a), (b) an effect pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect replacement process. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol replacement process by timing. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the normal chart and the special chart. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the hold information on the ordinary drawing side in 2nd Embodiment. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start process of a normal map, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the variation display time table for a normal map at the time of a ceiling. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during a change of a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect replacement process. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the normal chart and the special chart. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of the various counters used for the winning / failing lottery, etc. in the 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the hold information on the ordinary drawing side. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start process of a normal map, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the variation display time table for a normal map at the time of a ceiling. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect determination process. In the fourth embodiment, it is a front view showing the configuration of (a) a game board, (b) a schematic view of a through gate in a guided state, and (c) a through gate in a non-guided state. It is a schematic diagram of. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the pass / fail table for a special figure, and (b), (c) is an explanatory diagram for demonstrating the distribution table for a special figure. (A) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal figure winning / failing distribution table referred to in the low frequency support mode, and (b) it is an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal figure winning / failing distribution table referred to in the high frequency support mode. be. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the hold information on the ordinary drawing side, and (b) is the explanatory diagram for explaining the hold display lottery table. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display contents on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the hold information on the special figure side. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric termination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect determination process. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the normal chart and the special chart. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of a game. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a), (b) the situation that the required number of passages to the ceiling are different, and the consecutive villas which can be expected after that. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the acquisition process of the hold information on the normal drawing side. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the acquisition information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the acquisition process of the hold information on the normal drawing side.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in an exploded manner. Note that, in FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration in the gaming area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

The pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting a plurality of frame materials on four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. The outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration for the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in the island equipment of the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip portion thereof, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so as to be in a locked state. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PE formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PE, and the guiding means is provided by the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26. As a guide rail is configured. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PE by the guide rail.

By the way, the game ball launch mechanism 27 has a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying the game ball stored in the precision plate 66a described later on the launch rail 27a, and the launch rail 27a. It is equipped with a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. The solenoid 27c is driven and controlled by the rotation operation of the launch operation device (or launch handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14, and the game ball is launched.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings that penetrate in the front-rear direction by being processed by a router. Each opening has a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a special accessory 33, an operating opening 34, through gates 35A and 35B, a variable display unit 36, a lottery result display unit 37 for displaying various lottery results, and the like. Each is provided. The lottery result display unit 37 is provided with a special figure display unit 38 as a main display unit and a general map display unit 39 as an accessory display unit. It should be noted that a plurality of general winning openings 31 are provided.

Even if a ball enters the through gates 35A and 35B, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the special accessory 33, and the operating opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, when a ball enters the special accessory 33 or a ball enters the operating port 34, three prize balls are paid out and a general prize is won. When a ball enters the mouth 31 or a ball enters the special electric prize winning device 32, 10 prize balls are paid out.

However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and the number of prize balls may be different, for example, the number of prize balls applied to the operating port 34 is larger than the number of prize balls applied to the special accessory 33. The configuration may be the same as or more than at least one of the general winning opening 31 and the special electric winning device 32. Further, the number of prize balls applied to the special electric winning device 32 may be larger than the number of other prize balls.

In addition, an out opening 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and a game ball that has not entered various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area PE through the out opening 24a. Further, a large number of nails 24b are planted on the game board 24 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only is the ball discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PE after passing through the opening. Aspects that are not discharged are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the ball from entering the game ball into the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the special accessory 33, the operating port 34, and the through gates 35A and 35B are used. The entry of the game ball is also referred to as a prize.

The variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PE. Since the peripheral edge of the variable display unit 36 protrudes in front of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, the area where the game ball launched into the game area PE can flow down is partitioned. Specifically, the upper region PE1 which is a region above the predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36 in the game region PE, and the upper region PE1 which is continuously below the variable display unit 36 and the variable display unit 36. The left region PE2, which is the left region, the right region PE3, which is a region to the right of the variable display unit 36 and is continuous below the upper region PE1, and the left region PE2 and the right region PE3, respectively. On the other hand, it is continuously partitioned below the variable display unit 36 into a lower region PE4 which is a region below the variable display unit 36.

As the first launch operation, the player operates the launch operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the first range that is less than the reference rotation amount, so that the game ball is moved to the left of the lateral center position in the upper region PE1. Start to flow down. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PE1 → the left side region PE2 → the lower region PE4. On the other hand, as the second launch operation, the player operates the launch operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or greater than the reference rotation amount, so that the player operates the launch operation device 28 on the right side of the lateral center position in the upper region PE1. The game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PE1 → the right region PE3 → the lower region PE4. That is, by adjusting the amount of rotation of the launch operation device 28, the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left side region PE2 of the left side region PE2 and the right side region PE3, and the right side region. The game can be performed so that the game ball flows down the PE3.

The special accessory 33 is a winning device provided with two winning openings (special winning opening 52 and general winning opening 53) inside, and is installed from the left side region PE2 to the lower region PE4. The special accessory 33 has a long passage case 33b provided in a state of protruding toward the front side of the board surface of the game board 24, and a game ball flowing down the game area PE at the upper end of the passage case 33b. A ball passing port 33a through which the ball can pass is provided, and a game ball passing area R is formed below the ball passing port 33a. The ball passage port 33a constitutes an entrance portion of the special accessory 33, and is provided in the left side region PE2. The ball passage port 33a opens upward and is not provided with a member that opens and closes. Then, in the situation where the game ball is launched in the same mode, the passing frequency of the ball passing port 33a (which is also the passing probability of the through gate 35A) is constant regardless of the gaming state. The front side of the gaming machine is covered with a cover member 60 made of a non-transparent material in the aisle case 33b, and the winning openings and guiding members provided in the aisle case 33b, which will be described later, are from the front of the pachinko machine 10. It is not visible.

The actuating port 34 is installed in the right region PE3. That is, when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side region PE2, the operating port 34 cannot win a prize, and the launch operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the right side region PE3. If is operated, a prize can be won.

The configuration of the actuating port 34 will be described with reference to FIG. 4 (a) and 4 (b) are schematic views showing the configuration of the actuating port 34. The actuating port 34 is provided with a universal electric accessory 34a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The general electric accessory 34a is connected to a general electric drive unit 34b mounted on the back side of the game board 24, and is driven by the general electric power drive unit 34b in a closed state shown in FIG. 4 (a). It is arranged in either (non-supported or non-guided state) or open state (supported or guided state) shown in FIG. 4 (b). In the closed state of the general electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot win the prize in the operating port 34, and when the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the winning of the operating port 34 becomes possible. By the way, when it is in the open state, the general electric accessory 34a protrudes to the game area PE side and guides the winning of the operating port 34. A detection sensor 34c is provided in the operating port 34, and the detection sensor 34c detects a game ball that has won a prize in the operating port 34.

It should be noted that the general electric accessory 34a is switched between a state in which a game ball is likely to be won in the operating port 34 and a state in which the winning is not impossible but the winning is more difficult to occur than in the above-mentioned state in which the winning is likely to occur. It may be configured. Further, the general electric accessory 34a may be configured to switch between a state in which a prize is likely to occur and a state in which a prize is less likely to be generated by moving or rotating in the front-rear direction. Further, the universal electric accessory 34a may be inadequate, and switching between a state in which a prize is likely to occur and a state in which a prize is less likely to occur may be performed by the displacement of the actuating port 34 itself.

Of the left and right through gates 35A and 35B, the left through gate 35A is provided directly above the ball passage port 33a in the left region PE2, and the right through gate 35B is the actuating opening 34 in the right region PE3. It is provided above at predetermined intervals. In this case, when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side region PE2, the game ball can be won in the through gate 35A, and the game ball is launched so as to flow down the right side region PE3. When the operating device 28 is operated, the game ball can be won in the through gate 35B. The through gates 35A and 35B have a ball passage hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball winning the through gates 35A and 35B flows directly below the through gate 35A and 35B. As a result, all the game balls that have won the through gate 35A in the left side region PE2 pass through the ball passing port 33a and are introduced into the special accessory 33. Further, the game ball that has won the through gate 35B in the right region PE3 wins the operating opening 34 according to the subsequent ball movement and the state of the operating opening 34 (the opening / closing state of the accessory). Detection sensors 35c are provided in the through gates 35A and 35B, respectively, and the detection sensors 35c detect the game balls that have won the through gates 35A and 35B.

The general electric accessory 34a of the operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state based on the winning of the through gates 35A and 35B. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the through gates 35A and 35B, and a lottery result display unit 37 provided in the lower left corner, which is an area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PE, is used. A variable display of the pattern is performed on the figure display unit 39. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the support winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display is terminated, the mode shifts to the support execution mode. In the support execution mode, the general electric accessory 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

The normal figure display unit 39 is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to this, and is limited to a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and a CRT. Alternatively, it may be configured by other types of display devices such as a dot matrix display. Further, as the pattern to be variablely displayed on the general map display unit 39, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed. A configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the present embodiment, the number of holdings when the game ball wins the through gates 35A and 35B is 0. Therefore, there is no hold display unit corresponding to these.

However, for example, it may be possible to hold one or more of the winning prizes in the through gates 35A and 35B, and when one or more holdings are possible in this way, the position adjacent to the normal drawing display unit 39. It is advisable to have a general drawing hold display unit in. For example, it is preferable that the number of game balls that have won through gates 35A and 35B is held up to a maximum of four, and the number of holdings is displayed by lighting the normal figure hold display unit.

A big hit lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the operating opening 34 or the special winning opening 52. Then, the lottery result is clearly shown through the display effect in the special figure display unit 38 of the lottery result display unit 37 and the symbol display device 42 of the variable display unit 36.

Regarding the special figure display unit 38, in detail, the special figure display unit 38 is provided with a first special figure display unit 38a and a second special figure display unit 38b. In the first special figure display unit 38a, a big hit lottery is performed by using a prize in the special winning opening 52 as a trigger, so that a variable display of a pattern or a predetermined display is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. Further, in the second special figure display unit 38b, a big hit lottery is performed by using a winning prize in the operating port 34 as a trigger, so that a variable display or a predetermined display of the pattern is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed.

The first special figure display unit 38a and the second special figure display unit 38b are configured by a segment display unit in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, it may be composed of other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. The patterns displayed on the first special figure display unit 38a and the second special figure display unit 38b include a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, and a plurality of types of characters. Is displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed is conceivable.

About the symbol display device 42 In detail, the symbol display device 42 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 42 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display device. You may.

In the symbol display device 42, when the first special symbol display unit 38a performs a variable display or a predetermined display of the pattern based on the winning of the special winning opening 52, the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol is performed accordingly. At the same time, when the second special figure display unit 38b performs the variable display or the predetermined display of the design based on the winning of the operating port 34, the variable display or the predetermined display of the design is performed accordingly. Further, when the symbol display unit 39 performs the symbol variation display or the predetermined display based on the winning of the through gates 35A and 35B, the symbol variation display or the predetermined display is displayed on the symbol display device 42 accordingly. Will be done.

The display contents when the symbol display device 42 performs variable display of the symbol will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a display screen 42a of the symbol display device 42.

The design, which is a kind of design, is composed of nine types of main designs with numbers "1" to "9", and sub-designs consisting of shell-shaped patterns. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as an octopus are assigned numbers "1" to "9" to form a main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 5A, on the display screen 42a of the symbol display device 42, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol column Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols.

As shown in FIG. 5B, on the display screen 42a, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has become like. Further, as shown in FIG. 5A, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set on the display screen 42a. ..

When a variable display of symbols is performed on the display screen 42a based on winning a prize in the through gates 35A, 35B, the operating opening 34, or the special winning opening 52, the symbols in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have a predetermined orientation with periodicity. The variable display starts to scroll to. Then, the variable display is switched to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are statically displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. In addition, when the variable display of the symbol ends, when it corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode described later, or when it corresponds to the transition to the support execution mode described later, it is on one of the effective lines. The same combination of symbols is formed in.

It should be noted that, based on winning a prize in any of the through gates 35A and 35B, the operating port 34 and the special winning opening 52, the display is displayed on any of the special drawing display units 38a and 38b, the normal drawing display unit 39 and the symbol display device 42. Is started, a predetermined result is displayed, and the game is completed, which corresponds to one game. Further, the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 42 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern to be variablely displayed by the symbol display device 42 is not limited to the above-mentioned symbol, and may be configured such that only numbers are variablely displayed as the symbol, for example.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball wins a prize in the operating opening 34 or the special winning opening 52, the number of reservations is one for each. However, there is no hold display unit corresponding to these. This is a device for making it difficult to understand which of the winning games is based on the winning of the through gates 35A and 35B, the operating opening 34, or the special winning opening 52.

However, for example, it may be possible to hold a plurality of prizes for winning in the operating opening 34 and the special winning opening 52, and when a plurality of holdings are possible in this way, each of them is located adjacent to the special figure display unit 38. It is preferable that a special drawing hold display unit is provided. For example, it is preferable that the number of game balls winning in the operating opening 34 and the special winning opening 52 is held up to a maximum of four, and the holding number is displayed by lighting each special figure holding display unit.

If the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the operating port 34 and the special winning opening 52 is won, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 can be won. Here, when the game ball passes through the ball passage port 33a and the game ball is introduced into the special accessory 33, every time the ball passes through the ball passage port 33a, all the game balls win the special prize opening 52. This is not the case (that is, the jackpot lottery is not executed every time), and the game ball is won in the special winning opening 52 once for each passing of a predetermined number of balls, and the jackpot lottery is executed with the winning. ..

The special electric winning device 32 is provided below the operating port 34 in the right region PE3. That is, the special electric winning device 32 cannot win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PE2, and the launch operation device so that the game ball flows down the right area PE3. If 28 is operated, a prize can be won.

The special accessory 33 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the special accessory 33. 6 (b) to 6 (e) are explanatory views for explaining the operation of the special accessory 33. 6 (b) to 6 (e) show a simplified configuration of the special accessory 33 in order to facilitate the explanation of the operation of the special accessory 33.

As shown in FIG. 6A, in the special accessory 33, the passage case 33b is formed with a ball passage port 33a having a size that allows the game ball to pass through, and the game ball that has passed through the ball passage port 33a. A game ball passing region R through which the ball flows down is formed. In the game ball passing region R, the internal passage 51 is formed by the pair of surrounding walls 33c (upper and lower surrounding walls 33c) of the passage case 33b and the protrusions 33d provided between them. The internal passage 51 is a passage for guiding the game ball that has passed through the ball passing port 33a to either the special winning opening 52 or the general winning opening 53, and the special winning opening 52 and the general winning opening 52 are provided from the ball passing opening 33a. It is formed over the mouth 53.

If a game ball wins in the special winning opening 52, a big hit lottery is performed, and if a game ball wins in the general winning opening 53, a big hit lottery is not performed. It should be noted that the prize balls are played when the game ball wins in either the special prize opening 52 or the general winning opening 53, and in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls is three. The special winning opening 52 is provided with a detection sensor 52a for the special winning opening, and the general winning opening 53 is provided with a detection sensor 53a for the general winning opening. Both detection sensors 52a and 53a detect which winning opening the game ball has won.

The special accessory 33 shifts to a state in which the game balls are awarded to the special winning opening 52 as a predetermined number of game balls pass through the ball passing opening 33a. Specifically, the special accessory 33 is provided with a plurality of distribution plates 54 from the upstream side to the downstream side in the internal passage 51, and each of these distribution plates 54 has passed through the ball passage port 33a. Based on the arrival of the game ball, the distribution destination of the game ball in the game ball passage area R is changed. That is, each distribution plate 54 is rotatably supported in both forward and reverse directions by a rotation shaft 55 provided at a substantially central portion in the vertical direction thereof, and rotates about the rotation shaft 55. It can be said that each distribution plate 54 is a rocking body that swings when the game ball hits it. In this case, each distribution plate 54 has a first passage 51a side (lower right direction in the figure) in which the game ball can be awarded to the special winning opening 52 each time the game ball flows down from the upstream side in the internal passage 51. ) And the second passage 51b side (lower left direction in the figure) where winning is not possible in the special winning opening 52, respectively. In this embodiment, eight distribution plates 54 are provided.

These eight distribution plates 54 are arranged so that when the game ball is distributed to the first passage 51a side by the distribution plate 54 in the front stage, the game ball reaches the distribution plate 54 in the rear stage. When the number of passing game balls in the ball passing port 33a reaches a predetermined number, all the distribution destinations of the game balls for the eight distribution plates 54 are on the first passage 51a side, and the game balls are the special winning openings 52. It is designed to shift to the state of winning a prize.

In each distribution plate 54, the lower portion of the upper portion and the lower portion of the upper portion and the lower portion sandwiching the rotation shaft 55 is a thick tapered portion 56, and the width of the internal passage 51 is increased by this tapered portion 56. It is narrowed. In this case, when the game ball passes through the internal passage 51, the game ball comes into contact with the tapered portion 56 of the distribution plate 54, whereby the distribution plate 54 can be rotated. The distribution plate 54 rotated by the contact with the game ball guides the next passing game ball in a direction different from that of the currently passing game ball. Specifically, if the distribution destination of the game ball is the first passage 51a, each distribution plate 54 switches the distribution destination to the second passage 51b with the arrival of the next game ball, and conversely, If the distribution destination of the game ball is the second passage 51b, the distribution destination is switched to the first passage 51a with the arrival of the next game ball.

A magnet 57 is provided on the upper side of the distribution plate 54 with the rotation shaft 55 interposed therebetween. Further, on the inner side surface of the special accessory 33, a magnet 58 on the passage side is provided at a position that serves as a rotation trajectory of the magnet 57 on the distribution plate 54 side and is above the rotation shaft 55. Both magnets 57 and 58 are provided so as to have polarities that repel each other. Due to the repulsive force exerted by the magnets 57 and 58, the magnet 57 on the distribution plate 54 side is naturally arranged on either the right side or the left side of the magnet 58 on the passage side, and the game ball is placed in the first passage 51a and the first passage 51a. It is distributed to one of the two passages 51b.

The magnets 57 and 58 serve as a position holding means for holding the distribution plate 54 at either a predetermined position that descends to the right or a predetermined position that descends to the left when the distribution plate 54 rotates. Function. When the game ball hits the tapered portion 56 of the distribution plate 54, the magnet 57 on the distribution plate 54 side passes in front of the magnet 58 on the aisle side and moves to the opposite side in the left-right direction. Here, the rotation shaft 55 of the distribution plate 54 extends in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 and is connected to a rotation restriction portion (not shown) at a position on the back side of the internal passage 51. The rotation limiting portion regulates the rotation range of the distribution plate 54 so that the distribution plate 54 does not rotate more than necessary.

Eight distribution plates 54 are continuously provided from the ball passage port 33a to the winning openings 52 and 53, and there are 256 combinations of the states of the eight distribution plates 54, that is, combinations of distribution destinations. (= 2 to the 8th power street). Each time the game ball flows down the internal passage 51, the state of the eight distribution plates 54 changes, and the 256 combination states are sequentially switched. In the internal passage 51, the flow path is different for each combination of 256 distribution plates 54, and the game ball is guided from the ball passage port 33a to the special winning opening 52 by one of the combinations. Specifically, when all the distribution plates 54 are in a state of distributing the game balls to the first passage 51a side (lower right direction), the game balls flowing down the internal passage 51 win a prize in the special winning opening 52. do. All game balls that pass through other routes win a prize in the general winning opening 53.

By providing each distribution plate 54 as described above, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 10 with a ceiling function. Here, the ceiling function is a function in which a privilege is given to a player by performing a predetermined game a predetermined number of times, and the number of predetermined games to be performed before the privilege is granted is called a ceiling. In the present embodiment, if the winning of the ball passing port 33a can be generated 256 times, the ceiling can be reached, and the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be shifted to the opening / closing execution mode with a probability of almost 100%.

In the internal passage 51, the game balls distributed to the second passage 51b side (lower left direction) by each distribution plate 54 then reach the general winning opening 53 without passing through any distribution plate 54. Will be. At this time, the player gets the prize ball earlier than the case where the special winning opening 52 is reached because the amount does not pass through the distribution plate 54 on the downstream side. Here, if there is a time difference (time lag) between the case where the game ball wins in the special winning opening 52 and the case where the game ball wins in the general winning opening 53, the winning ball is generated from the occurrence of the ball passing at the ball passing opening 33a. By measuring the time until, the player can predict whether or not a prize has been generated in the special winning opening 52. In order to make this prediction difficult, a ball contact portion 51c is provided on the second passage 51b side to which a game ball flowing down from the upstream side hits. When the game ball collides with the ball contact portion 51c, the downward guidance of the game ball is temporarily loosened. As a result, it is possible to prevent a time lag from occurring between the ball passing at the ball passing port 33a and the prize ball when the ball does not pass through any of the distribution plates 54.

Next, the game ball distribution operation in the special accessory 33 will be described more specifically with reference to FIGS. 6 (b) to 6 (e). Here, for the sake of easy understanding, a configuration using only two distribution plates 54 will be described. In the configuration in which the two distribution plates 54 are provided in this way, there are four combinations (= 2 squares) as the state of each distribution plate 54, and every four game balls have passed through the ball passage port 33a. You will be guided to the special winning opening 52.

In FIG. 6B, as an initial state, each distribution plate 54 is in a state of distributing game balls to the lower left (second passage 51b side). When the first game ball passes through the ball passage opening 33a in this state, the game ball is distributed to the lower left (second passage 51b side) by the distribution plate 54 on the upper stage side, and a prize is awarded to the general winning opening 53. .. By passing the first game ball, the distribution destination of the distribution plate 54 on the upper stage side is switched, and the special accessory 33 is in the state of FIG. 6 (c).

Next, when the second game ball passes through the ball passage port 33a, the game ball is distributed to the lower right (first passage 51a side) by the distribution plate 54 on the upper stage side, and is distributed to the lower stage side. It is distributed to the lower left (second passage 51b side) by the plate 54, and a prize is won in the general winning opening 53. By passing the second game ball, the distribution destinations of the distribution plates 54 on both the upper and lower stages are switched, and the special accessory 33 is in the state shown in FIG. 6 (d).

Next, when the third game ball passes through the ball passage opening 33a, the game ball is distributed to the lower left (second passage 51b side) by the distribution plate 54 on the upper stage side, and a prize is won in the general winning opening 53. .. With the passage of the third game ball, the distribution destination of the distribution plate 54 on the upper stage side is switched, and the special accessory 33 is in the state of FIG. 6 (e).

Next, when the fourth game ball passes through the ball passage port 33a, the game ball is distributed to the lower right (first passage 51a side) by the distribution plate 54 on the upper stage side, and is distributed to the lower stage side. It is distributed to the lower right (on the side of the first passage 51a) by the plate 54, and a prize is won in the special winning opening 52. With the passage of the fourth game ball, the distribution destinations of the distribution plates 54 on both the upper and lower stages are switched, and the special accessory 33 returns to the state shown in FIG. 6 (e). Similarly, as the game ball passes through the ball passage port 33a, each distribution plate 54 repeats the operation of FIG. 6 (b) → (c) → (d) → (e). Therefore, it is possible to win a game ball in the special winning opening 52 for each predetermined number of balls passed.

In the special accessory 33 of the present embodiment, by providing the distribution plates 54 in eight upper and lower stages, a prize is generated in the special winning opening 52 every time the game ball passes through the ball passing opening 33a 256 times. , The number of times can be changed arbitrarily. For example, if only one distribution plate 54 is provided, a prize is generated in the special winning opening 52 every time the game ball passes through the ball passing opening 33a twice. Further, if the distribution plate 54 is provided in the upper and lower 6 stages, a prize is generated in the special winning opening 52 every time the game ball passes through the ball passage port 33a 64 times, and the distribution plate 54 is provided in the upper and lower 7 stages. For example, every time the game ball passes through the ball passage opening 33a 128 times, a prize is given to the special winning opening 52.

Here, in order to realize the ceiling function in the pachinko machine 10, it is desirable that the winning probability of the big hit lottery executed when the game ball wins in the special winning opening 52 is almost 100%. As a result, when the game ball is repeatedly introduced into the special accessory 33, the jackpot winning is executed every time the game times are executed a predetermined number of times (256 times in the present embodiment).

Next, the special electric winning device 32 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 3, the special electric winning device 32 has a large winning opening 32a having a size that allows the game ball to pass through, and is in a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass through the large winning opening 32a. It is provided with an opening / closing member 32b on the special electric side that switches to an open state through which a ball can pass. The opening / closing member 32b on the special electric side is opened by being driven by a drive unit 32c for special electric through a link mechanism (not shown). Further, the special electric winning device 32 is formed with a winning passing portion at a position where the game ball won in the special electric winning device 32 always passes through the large winning opening 32a, and further, the position of the winning passing portion. A detection sensor 32e for a large winning opening is provided so that a detection area exists in the area. The detection sensor 32e for the large winning opening individually detects the game balls that have won the special electric winning device 32.

The front door frame 14 is provided so that the game board 24 having the above configuration covers the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire area of the game area PE can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this, and may be formed colorless and transparent by synthetic resin, and the gaming area PE is formed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62. It may be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

Light emitting means such as various light emitting parts are provided around the window portion 61. A display light emitting unit 63 is provided on the right side of the window unit 61 as a part of various light emitting units. Further, an error light emitting unit 64 is provided above the window unit 61. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 65 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided.

Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 66 and a lower bulging portion 67 bulging toward the front side are arranged side by side. An upper plate 66a opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 66, and a lower plate 67a also opened upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 67. The upper plate 66a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 67a has a function of storing the surplus game balls in the upper plate 66a.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 71 that controls the main control of the game is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 71 has a main control board housed in a board box.

The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 71. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism unit 73 and a control device collective unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

The payout mechanism unit 73 includes a tank 75 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game ball paid out from the payout device 76 is discharged to the upper plate 66a or the lower plate 67a through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism unit 73 is provided with, for example, a back pack board having a power switch for turning on and off the power supply while supplying a main power supply of AC 24 volts.

The control device collective unit 74 generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by the payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76 and various control devices, and is accompanied by the operation of the launch operation device 28 by the player. It includes a power supply and a launch control device 78 for controlling the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply and launch control device 78 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

The back pack 72 is provided with an external terminal board 79 in addition to the payout mechanism unit 73 and the control device collective unit 74. The external terminal board 79 is installed on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 at the upper corner portion on the rotation base end side of the back pack unit 15. The external terminal board 79 is a board for outputting a predetermined signal in order to make the management computer of the game hall recognize the state of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The main control device 71 includes a main control board 81 that controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board (power failure monitoring board) 85 that monitors the power supply. The MPU 82 is mounted on the main control board 81. The MPU 82 contains a ROM 83 and a RAM 84.

The ROM 83 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage retention as read-only. The ROM 83 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 82.

The RAM 84 is configured to use a memory such as an SRAM or DRAM that requires power supply from the outside for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access and when compared with the same data capacity. The time required for reading is faster than that of ROM 83. The RAM 84 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 83 is executed.

In addition to the above elements, the MPU 82 or the main control board 81 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like. It is not essential that the ROM 83 and the RAM 84 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 82, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to other control devices.

The MPU 82 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 85, a payout control device 77, various detection sensors 32e, 34c, 35c, 52a, 53a and the like are connected to the input side of the MPU 82. A power supply and a launch control device 78 are connected to the power failure monitoring board 85, and power is supplied to the MPU 82 via the power failure monitoring board 85. Further, based on the detection results of the various detection sensors 32e, 34c, 35c, 52a, 53a, the MPU 82 determines the winning of each winning portion (ball winning determination). Further, in the MPU 82, a big hit lottery is executed based on the winning of the special winning opening 52 or the operating opening 34, and the support lottery is executed based on the winning of the through gates 35A and 35B.

A power failure monitoring board 85, a payout control device 77, and a sound light control device 300 are connected to the output side of the MPU 82. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on the winning determination result for the winning unit. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, a final stop command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the sound light control device 300. Details of these various commands will be described later.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 82, a drive unit 32c for special electric power that opens and closes the opening / closing member 32b of the special electric winning device 32, and a drive unit 34b for general electric power that opens and closes the general electric accessory 34a of the operating port 34 are connected. Further, a lottery result display unit 37 including a first special figure display unit 38a, a second special figure display unit 38b, and a general map display unit 39 is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 81, and the MPU 82 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Further, an external terminal board 79 is connected to the output side of the MPU 82. The external terminal board 79 is provided with a plurality of external terminals (output terminals). For example, eight external terminals are provided, and the types of information output externally to the management computer are different. These multiple external terminals are a terminal for externally outputting an open / close execution signal indicating that the open / close execution mode is in progress, and a terminal for externally outputting a support execution signal indicating that the support execution mode is in progress. And a terminal for externally outputting a high-frequency signal indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in progress. The MPU 82 sets information according to the progress of the game in the external output buffer provided in the RAM 84. Then, according to the information set in the external output buffer, the setting for signal output is made to the external terminal board 79, and the state of the pachinko machine 10 is recognized by the management computer of the game hall. Each external terminal is configured by using a photocoupler in order to prevent the reverse flow while enabling transmission of an electric signal from the main control device 71 to the management computer.

The power failure monitoring board 85 relays between the main control board 81 and the power supply and launch control device 78, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 71.

The power supply and the launch control device 78 are connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, the operating power required for each of the main control board 81, the payout control device 77, etc. is generated based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. do. By the way, the power supply and the launch control device 78 are provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power failure is mainly used. Power for storage retention is supplied to the RAM 84 of the control device 71. Further, the power supply and the launch control device 78 are responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and drive the game ball launch mechanism 27 based on specifying a predetermined launch operation for the launch operation device 28.

The MPU 302 is mounted on the sound light control board 301 provided in the sound light control device 300. The MPU 302 is a ROM 303 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 302, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 303 is executed. A certain RAM 304, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built-in.

The MPU 302 drives and controls the display light emitting unit 63, the error light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 provided on the front door frame 14 based on the command received from the main control device 71. Further, these commands are transmitted as they are or the corresponding commands after analysis are transmitted to the display control device 400. Incidentally, the sound / light control device 300 is electrically connected to the display control device 400 via a connector unit (connection unit) provided with connectors at both ends of the signal line.

The display control device 400 includes a display control board 401 on which an MPU 402, which is an element in which a program ROM 403 and a work RAM 404 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 405, a character ROM 406, and a video RAM 407, respectively, are mounted. It is equipped with.

The MPU 402 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 71 via the sound and light control device 300, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 405 (specifically, an internal command for the VDP 405). Generation) is carried out.

The program ROM 403 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 402 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for a background image. The work RAM 404 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 402.

The VDP405 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built in the symbol display device 42. Since the VDP405 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 405 adjusts the timings of the MPU 402, the video RAM 407, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 407 from the character ROM 406 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 42.

The character ROM 406 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 42. The character ROM 406 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. These image data, tables, etc. are stored in the character ROM 406.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 406 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 406. Further, it is also possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 403 in the character ROM 406.

The video RAM 407 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 42, and the display content of the symbol display device 42 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 407.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery at MPU82>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery in the MPU 82 will be described with reference to FIG.

The MPU 82 uses various counter information to perform a big hit lottery, an open lottery for a general electric accessory 34a, a display setting for the first special figure display unit 38a and the second special figure display unit 38b, and a symbol display for the symbol display device 42. Settings, display settings of the general map display unit 39, etc. are to be performed. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery for generating jackpots, the support type counter C2 used for the lottery for the type of support mode set after the open / close execution mode, and the operating port 34 or the special winning opening 52 are awarded. The first reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery when the symbol display device 42 deviates and fluctuates based on the above, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and each special figure display unit. The first variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation display time (operation continuation time or special figure variation time) in the 38a, 38b and the symbol display device 42, and a support lottery for whether or not to open the general electric accessory 34a. The normal electric random number counter C4 used for the above, the second reach random number counter C5 used for the reach generation lottery when the symbol display device 42 disengages and fluctuates based on the winning of the through gates 35A and 35B, and the general drawing display unit 39. The second variation type counter CS2, which determines the variation display time (operation continuation time or normal map variation time) in the above, is used. The counters C1 to C5, CINI, and CS1 to CS2 are provided in the lottery counter area 101 of the RAM 84.

Each of the counters C1 to C5, CINI, and CS1 to CS2 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals.

The numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the support type counter C2, and the first reach random number counter C3 is provided as acquisition information storage means for the jackpot lottery when a prize is generated in the operating port 34 or the special winning port 52. It is stored in the special figure holding area 102. The special figure holding area 102 includes a first special drawing holding area 103, a second special drawing holding area 104, and an execution area 105 for special drawing.

The first special figure holding area 103 and the second special drawing holding area 104 are provided with one holding and storage area. Then, in a situation where neither the effect for the game round nor the open / close execution mode is executed, and the hold information is not acquired in the first special figure hold area 103, a prize is generated in the special winning opening 52. By doing so, each numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the support type counter C2, and the first reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first special figure holding area 103 as the holding information on the special figure side, and the second special figure holding area 104. When a prize is awarded to the operation port 34 in a situation where the hold information has not been acquired, each numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the support type counter C2, and the first reach random number counter C3 is used as the hold information on the special figure side. , Stored in the second special figure holding area 104.

In the execution area 105 for the special figure, when the variation display is started by any of the special figure display units 38a and 38b, the hold information for the target for performing the hit / fail determination and the distribution determination for the special figure is stored. It is an area. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special figure display unit 38a is started, the hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 103 is moved to the execution area 105 for the special figure. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special figure display unit 38b is started, the hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 104 is moved to the execution area 105 for the special figure.

On the other hand, the normal map holding area 106 provided as the acquisition information storage means for the support lottery is not provided with the hold storage area, and when the normal map display unit 39 starts the variable display. Only the execution area 107 for the general drawing is provided as an area for storing the hold information for which the pass / fail determination for support is to be performed. Therefore, various numerical information of the normal electric random number counter C4, the second reach random number counter C5, and the second variable type counter CS2 are directly placed in the execution area 107 for the normal drawing when the through gates 35A and 35B are won. It is stored and the pass / fail judgment for support is started. That is, various numerical information for the support lottery is stored only when the through gates 35A and 35B are won in the situation where the hold information is not stored in the execution area 107 for the normal map, and the execution area for the normal map is stored. Even if a prize is awarded to the through gates 35A and 35B while the hold information is stored in 107, various numerical information for the support lottery is not held.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and as described above, it is stored in the special figure holding area 102 at the timing when the game ball wins in the operating opening 34 or the special winning opening 52.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a hit / miss table for the jackpot in the hit / miss table storage area as the hit / miss information group storage means in the ROM 83. As the winning / failing table for the jackpot, a common winning / failing table for special figures used for determining the winning / failing of the reserved information acquired based on the winning of the operating port 34 or the special winning opening 52 is set.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a jackpot result and a missed result are set as a winning / failing result by referring to the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot result is a result of shifting the game state to the open / close execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 is opened / closed.

The open / close execution mode is executed up to a predetermined number of round games. The round game satisfies either the condition that the opening duration for the special electric power elapses or that the upper limit number of game balls for the special electric power is awarded to the large winning opening 32a. It is a game that continues until it is played. In this pachinko machine 10, only the opening / closing execution mode in which the upper limit of the number of round games is set to 2 rounds exists, but a plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes are set so that the upper limit of the number of round games is different. It may have been done.

The opening duration of each round game is the same, and the opening duration is 29.5 sec, which is the upper limit winning response time equal to or greater than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of winnings. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launching operation device 28 is continuously operated by the player, the gaming ball is launched so that one gaming ball is launched toward the gaming area PE every 0.6 sec. The mechanism 27 is driven and controlled. In addition, the maximum number of winning round games is set to 10. Then, in each round game, the opening duration is set to be equal to or greater than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of the corresponding round games, and the firing operation is performed in a manner aiming at winning the special electric winning device 32. If is continued, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 32a will be generated in each round game.

If the maximum number of round games can be won, the open duration of each round game is arbitrary. Further, the opening duration may be different between the round games, and in this case, the opening duration may be significantly different between the round games, and they are set to be substantially the same so as to be apparently the same. May be good.

As shown in FIG. 9A, a jackpot result and a missed result are set as the hit / miss result in the hit / miss table for the special figure. The number of random numbers that result in a big hit is set to 599, and the probability of a big hit result is 599/600 by referring to the hit / miss table for special figures. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the probability may be set lower than the above.

Next, the support type counter C2 will be described.

The support type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 27, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The support type counter C2 is periodically updated, and as described above, it is stored in the special figure holding area 102 at the timing when the game ball wins in the operating opening 34 or the special winning opening 52.

The support type counter C2 is used to determine the support mode of the utility accessory 34a of the actuating port 34 after the end of the open / close execution mode. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when compared in a situation where the game ball is continuously launched to the game area PE in the same manner as the support mode, the general electric accessory 34a is opened per unit time. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of states is relatively high or low.

Here, first, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 will be briefly described.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35A always enters the special accessory 33. Then, the game ball that has entered the 256th time wins a prize in the special winning opening 52. Based on the winning of the special winning opening 52, the above-mentioned jackpot random number counter C1 is acquired, and almost 100% of the jackpot random number counter C1 is the jackpot result. When the big hit result is obtained, the special electric winning device 32 shifts to the open / close execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 is opened, and the player can obtain the winning ball by winning the game ball into the large winning opening 32a of the special electric winning device 32. .. Further, the opening / closing execution mode can also be shifted to the winning / failing lottery based on the winning of the operating port 34. As described above, the operating port 34 is allowed to win a prize when the general electric accessory 34a is opened.

The Fuden random number counter C4 is used for a lottery as to whether or not to open the Fuden accessory 34a. The high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning a support (opening the general-purpose accessory 34a) in the support lottery using the normal electric random number counter C4, and low-frequency support. The winning probability is lower in the mode than in the high frequency support mode. When the support is won, in any of the support modes, the opening for 5 sec, which is longer than the firing cycle of the game ball, is performed once. That is, in any of the support modes, if the support is won, the operating port 34 is allowed to win a prize, and it is possible to shift to the open / close execution mode.

On the other hand, in the low-frequency support mode, the winning probability of the support lottery is set lower than that in the high-frequency support mode, so that it is difficult to win a prize in the operating port 34 in the low-frequency support mode as compared with the high-frequency support mode. Further, when the through gate 35A is won a prize rather than the through gate 35B, the prize balls (three in this embodiment) are paid out based on the subsequent winning to the special winning opening 52 or the general winning opening 53, which is more special. Since the special winning opening 52 is won at the 256th time due to the switching of the distribution plate 54 in the accessory 33, there is an advantage that the through gate 35A is closer to the ceiling.

Therefore, as a player, in the low frequency support mode, the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left region PE2 in order to win a prize in the through gate 35A, and when the support is won or a special prize is won. When the opening / closing execution mode is entered based on the winning of the mouth 52, the operation mode of the firing operation device 28 is switched so that the game ball flows down the right region PE3 in order to win a prize at the operating mouth 34 or the large winning mouth 32a. ..

In the high frequency support mode, the prize ball will not be paid out depending on the prize in the through gate 35B, but the support will be won more frequently than in the low frequency support mode, and the prize will be awarded based on the prize in the operating port 34. You can get a sphere. Then, since the opening / closing execution mode is entered by winning a prize in the operating port 34, a prize ball can be obtained even by winning a prize in the large winning opening 32a. Therefore, the player basically operates the launch operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the right region PE3 in order to win a prize in the through gate 35B in the high frequency support mode.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the ceiling function is realized by using the special accessory 33, and a novel game is realized by using the prize on the normal map side, the prize on the special map side, and the height of the support mode. ing.

As mentioned above, you can also receive a support lottery by winning the through gate 35B, and by winning the support, even in the low frequency support mode, the opening of the general electric accessory 34a is longer than the firing cycle of the game ball. It is also conceivable that the launching operation device 28 may be operated so that the through gate 35B is won a prize even in the low frequency support mode depending on the player. In this case, the special winning opening 52 cannot be won, but the ease of winning in the through gate 35A and the through gate 35B, that is, depending on the nail 24b and the gauge configuration, is fired so as to win the through gate 35B. There is also a merit of operating the operating device 28.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 10, the nails 24b are arranged so that the through gate 35B is easier to win than the through gate 35A from the viewpoint of suitable progress of the game and adjustment of the ball ejection rate in the high frequency support mode. And gauge configuration is designed. That is, in the high frequency support mode, it is necessary to make it easy to win the through gate 35B so that the operating port 34 can be easily won, and if it is too easy to win the through gate 35A, it is easy to make a special prize. There is a concern that the ball ejection rate will rise due to the winning of the mouth 52. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, even if the launching operation device 28 is operated aiming at either the left or right through gates 35A or 35B, there is a merit and both playability can be realized, and either of the through gates 35A or 35B can be realized. A new game has also been added that allows the player to select whether to operate the launch operation device 28 aiming at.

However, in the present embodiment, when a prize is given to the through gate 35A, a prize ball is paid out based on the prize to the special winning opening 52 or the general winning opening 53, and the number of ceilings is related to the fact that the through gate 35A is awarded a prize. The merit is set to be larger than the merit of winning the through gate 35B, and basically, as described above, the player sets the launch operation device 28 so as to win the through gate 35A in the low frequency support mode. Manipulate.

The distribution result for the support type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 83. As the distribution table, the distribution table for the first special figure used for the distribution determination of the reserved information acquired based on the prize in the special winning opening 52, and the distribution table acquired based on the winning in the operating opening 34. A distribution table for the second special figure used for determining the distribution of the reserved information is set. Then, in these distribution tables, a low frequency result and a high frequency result are set as the distribution results.

If the distribution result is a low frequency result, the support mode after the corresponding open / close execution mode ends is set to the low frequency support mode regardless of the type of the previous support mode. This low frequency support mode continues until the next big hit result and the high frequency support mode is set.

When the distribution result becomes a high frequency result, the support mode after the corresponding open / close execution mode ends is set to the high frequency support mode regardless of the type of the previous support mode. This high-frequency support mode is a high-frequency support mode in which the number of times the game shifts to the low-frequency support mode is limited when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the transition.

As the distribution table for the first special figure, a common distribution table is set regardless of the height of the support mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9B, high-frequency results are selected regardless of the value of the support type counter C2. Therefore, when the open / close execution mode is entered with the hold information acquired based on the winning of the special winning opening 52 as a trigger, the high frequency support mode is always set thereafter.

As the distribution table for the second special figure, different distribution tables are set depending on the height of the support mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9C, the high frequency result is selected for the distribution table for the second special figure referred to in the low frequency support mode regardless of the value of the support type counter C2. It has become so. Therefore, when the hold information acquired based on the winning of the operating port 34 in the low frequency support mode is used as the trigger to shift to the open / close execution mode, the high frequency support mode is always set thereafter. On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second special figure referred to in the high frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 9D, "0" among the values of the support type counter C2 of "0 to 27" is It corresponds to the low frequency result, and "1 to 27" corresponds to the high frequency result. Therefore, when the open / close execution mode is entered in the high-frequency support mode triggered by the hold information acquired based on the winning of the operation port 34, the high-frequency support mode is higher than the probability that the low-frequency support mode is set thereafter. Is higher in probability.

That is, in the low frequency support mode, when the opening / closing execution mode is entered based on the winning of either the special winning opening 52 or the operating opening 34, the high frequency support mode is always changed thereafter. Then, in the high-frequency support mode, the low-frequency support mode is shifted to the low-frequency support mode with a probability of 1/28 after the opening / closing execution mode that is shifted based on the winning of the operating port 34.

Next, the first reach random number counter C3 and the second reach random number counter C5 will be described.

The first reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, reach a maximum value, and then return to 0. The first reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and as described above, it is stored in the special figure holding area 102 at the timing when the game ball wins in the operating opening 34 or the special winning opening 52.

Further, the second reach random number counter C5 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 283, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The second reach random number counter C5 is periodically updated, and is stored in the execution area 107 for normal drawing on condition that the hold information is not stored at the timing when the game ball wins the through gates 35A and 35B.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the variation display of the normal map display unit 39 is started and the variation display on the symbol display device 42 is started when the game ball wins the through gates 35A and 35B. To. Further, upon winning a prize in the operating port 34 or the special winning opening 52, the variable display of the special figure display units 38a and 38b is started, and the variable display in the symbol display device 42 is started. That is, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of prizes that trigger the start of variable display in the symbol display device 42.

In the following description, the variable display of the symbol display device 42 based on the winning of the through gates 35A and 35B and the variable display of the symbol display device 42 based on the winning of the operating port 34 or the special winning opening 52 will be described. To distinguish, the variation display of the symbol display device 42 based on the winning of the through gates 35A and 35B is also called the normal map sub-variation, and the special symbol sub of the symbol display device 42 based on the winning of the operating port 34 or the special winning opening 52. Also called fluctuation. Further, in order to distinguish the fluctuation display of the normal map display unit 39 based on the winning of the through gates 35A and 35B from the above-mentioned normal map sub-variation, the fluctuation display of the normal map display unit 39 is also referred to as a normal map main variation. Further, in order to distinguish the variation display of the special figure display units 38a and 38b based on the winning of the operating port 34 or the special winning opening 52 from the above-mentioned special figure sub-variation, the variation display of the special figure display units 38a and 38b is specially drawn. Also called the main fluctuation.

Here, the reach display is provided with a symbol display device 42 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture), and varies in the game times when the transition to the open / close execution mode or the support execution mode occurs. In a gaming machine in which the stop display result after display is a special display result, after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 42 is started, before the stop display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state in which the special display result is likely to occur.

In the reach display, a combination of jackpot symbols may be established by stopping and displaying a part of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen 42a of the symbol display device 42. A display state is included in which the combination of the above is displayed and the variable display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows in that state. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image. , A combination of reach symbols is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen to perform a reach effect.

In the special figure sub-variation in the low frequency support mode, the reach display is executed regardless of the value of the first reach random number counter C3 in the game round of shifting to the open / close execution mode. Further, in the game round that does not shift to the open / close execution mode, when the first reach random number counter C3 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display by referring to the first reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 83. Is executed.

Further, in the normal map sub-variation in the low frequency support mode, the reach display is executed regardless of the value of the second reach random number counter C5 in the game times when the mode shifts to the support execution mode. Further, in the game rounds that do not shift to the support execution mode, when the second reach random number counter C5 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display by referring to the second reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 83. Is executed.

Here, in the low-frequency support mode, the same mode of variation display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the special map sub-variation and the normal map sub-variation is set. The reach display in the above-mentioned special map sub-variation and the reach display in the general map sub-variation also have the same contents, although the effect contents of the plurality of reach displays are set respectively. In addition, in both the case of shifting to the open / close execution mode in the special figure sub-variation and the case of shifting to the support execution mode in the normal map sub-variation, the same combination of symbols is formed on the effective line and the game round ends. do. Therefore, the player cannot specify whether the special map sub-variation or the normal map sub-variation is executed from the effect content of the symbol display device 42. Further, even if the symbol is finally stopped, until either the special electric winning device 32 or the general electric accessory 34a is opened, the combination of the above symbols is triggered by the change of either the normal figure side or the special symbol side. It is not possible to specify whether it was formed.

That is, in the present embodiment, the effect on the special figure side is the same as the effect on the normal figure side in the effect by the symbol display device 42, while increasing the motivation of the player to continue the game by using the ceiling function of the special accessory 33. By doing so, it is possible to make it appear as if the ceiling function is realized based on the winning of the through gate 35A, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the winning of the through gate 35A.

In the high frequency support mode, the reach display does not occur regardless of the numerical information of the reach random number counters C3 and C5 and the game result. Specifically, as the effect of each game time of the symbol display device 42 in the high frequency support mode, the fluctuation display of each game time of the normal figure sub-variation and the special figure sub-variation is not executed, and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. Only in the game times to be played, a jackpot notification to that effect (for example, a character display of jackpot and a production by a sound effect) is performed. This is a device to suppress the slackness caused by the staging during the consecutive villas.

Next, the first variable type counter CS1 and the second variable type counter CS2 will be described.

The first variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The first variation type counter CS1 has a variation display time (display continuation period) in the special figure display units 38a and 38b, that is, a variation display time of the special figure main variation, and a symbol variation display time in the symbol display device 42, that is, a special figure. It is used in determining the fluctuation display time of the sub-variation in the MPU 82. The first variation type counter CS1 is acquired at the time of determining the effect pattern at the start of the special map main variation and the start of the special map sub variation.

The second variation type counter CS2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The second variation type counter CS2 has a variation display time (display continuation period) in the normal map display unit 39, that is, a variation display time of the normal map main variation, and a symbol variation display time in the symbol display device 42, that is, a normal map sub-variation. It is used in determining the variable display time of the MPU 82. Unlike the first variable type counter CS1, the second variable type counter CS2 is set in the execution area 107 for normal drawing on the condition that the hold information is not stored at the timing when the through gates 35A and 35B are won. Stored.

In determining these variable display times, the variable display time table (variable display time information group) stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area (variable display time information storage means) of the ROM 83 is referred to.

In the low frequency support mode, the fluctuation display time table for the special figure main variation and the special figure sub variation is when the effect for the game is executed triggered by the hold information related to the operation opening 34 or the hold information related to the special winning opening 52. And, in the high frequency support mode, the holding information related to the operation opening 34 or the holding information related to the special winning opening 52 is used as a trigger to execute the effect for the game round, and the case is stored separately. The variable display time in the high frequency support mode is set shorter than the variable display time in the low frequency support mode.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10A, the variable display time in the low frequency support mode is set to 20 sec, and the result of the jackpot lottery is maintained for 0.6 sec after the variable display. To. Further, as shown in FIG. 10B, the fluctuation display time in the high frequency support mode is set to 0.64 sec, and the result of the jackpot lottery is maintained for 0.6 sec after the fluctuation display.

That is, the information of the fluctuation display time in the special map main fluctuation and the special map sub-variation read out during the high frequency support mode, and the fluctuation display time in the special map main fluctuation and the special map sub-variation read out during the low frequency support mode. Although their lengths are different, they are the same regardless of the value of the first variation type counter CS1. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity of the variable display time information stored in advance. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the game is performed aiming at the winning of the operating port 34, and the winning of the special winning opening 52 is unintentionally generated, so that the production for the game rotation may be shortened. preferable.

On the other hand, the fluctuation display time table in the normal map main fluctuation and the normal map sub-variation wins the through gates 35A and 35B in the low frequency support mode in the same way as the fluctuation display time table in the special map main fluctuation and the special map sub-variation. It is stored separately in the case where the effect for the game round is executed as an opportunity and the case where the effect for the game round is executed when the through gates 35A and 35B are won in the high frequency support mode. The variable display time in the high frequency support mode is set shorter than the variable display time in the low frequency support mode. However, unlike the fluctuation display time table for the special map main fluctuation and the special map sub-variation, the fluctuation display time table for the normal map main fluctuation and the normal map sub-variation has the fluctuation display time for non-reach in the low frequency support mode. A table and a variable display time table for when reach occurs are set.

Specifically, in the variation display time table for non-reach occurrence in the low frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 10 (c), a plurality of variations are set according to the value of the second variation type counter CS2. In the embodiment, three types of 12.0 sec, 15.0 sec, and 18.0 sec are set, and the result of the support lottery is maintained for 0.6 sec after the variation display. Further, in the variation display time table for when reach occurs in the low frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 10D, the second variation type counter CS2 is set to be longer than the variation display time when reach is not generated. In this embodiment, three types of 24 sec, 36 sec, and 42 sec are set according to the value of, and the result of the support lottery is maintained for 0.6 sec after the variation display. On the other hand, the variable display time in the high frequency support mode is set to the same 2.74 sec as shown in FIG. 10 (e), and the result of the support lottery is 0.6 sec after the variable display. It is maintained throughout.

That is, the information on the fluctuation display time in the normal map main fluctuation and the normal map sub-variation read out during the high frequency support mode is the same regardless of which of the through gates 35A and 35B is awarded. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity of the variable display time information stored in advance. In addition, the information of the fluctuation display time in the normal map main fluctuation and the normal map sub-variation read out during the low frequency support mode differs depending on the presence / absence of reach occurrence and the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, and the normal map main fluctuation and the normal map sub-variation. Figure It is possible to make various effects for playing games in sub-variations. Further, the variable display time set in the low frequency support mode is the time (period) assumed to be required from the time when the game ball passes through the through gate 35A to the time when the special winning opening 52 or the general winning opening 53 is awarded. ) (For example, 10 sec). This effect will be described in detail later.

As for the variable display time on the special map side, the variable display time may be set to be different between the time when reach occurs and the time when reach does not occur, as in the case of the variable display time on the normal map side.

Next, the Fuden random number counter C4 will be described.

The normal electric random number counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 719, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The Fuden random number counter C4 is updated periodically, and as described above, it is stored in the execution area 107 of the Fuzu hold area 106 on condition that the hold information is not stored at the timing when the through gates 35A and 35B are won. To. As described above, a support lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the Fuden accessory 34a to the open state by using the value of the Fuden random number counter C4.

As described above, although the winning probability of the support lottery differs depending on the support mode, the opening mode of the general electric accessory 34a when the support is won is the same.

Specifically, in the normal figure winning / failing table referred to in the low frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 11A, the support winning result and the losing result are set as the winning / failing result. When the lottery result is the support winning result, the general electric accessory 34a is released once, and the opening duration is set to 5 sec. Of the "0 to 719" values of the normal random number counter C4, "0 to 5" corresponds to the support winning result, and "6 to 719" corresponds to the off result.

That is, in the low frequency support mode, the general electric accessory 34a is opened with a probability of 1/120 based on the winning of the through gates 35A and 35B, and for example, the player shoots a game ball aiming at the through gate 35A. In this case, if the lottery result accompanying the winning of the through gate 35A becomes the support winning result, it is possible to win the prize in the operating port 34, so that the opening / closing execution mode is entered regardless of the number of times the ball is entered to the ceiling. It is possible to migrate.

As shown in FIG. 11B, in the normal figure winning / failing table referred to in the high frequency support mode, a support winning result and a losing result are set as winning results. When the lottery result is the support winning result, the general electric accessory 34a is released once, and the opening duration is set to 5 sec. Of the "0 to 719" values of the normal random number counter C4, "0 to 575" corresponds to the support winning result, and "576 to 719" corresponds to the off result. That is, in the high frequency support mode, the general electric accessory 34a is opened with a probability of 12/15 based on the winning of the through gates 35A and 35B, and the operation port 34 is reached earlier than in the low frequency support mode. It is possible to win a prize.

It should be noted that the case where the support mode is the low frequency support mode instead of the open / close execution mode corresponds to the normal gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Further, instead of the configuration in which the counter for each lottery is provided in the RAM 84, the MPU 82 may be provided as a dedicated circuit so as not to contribute to the update of the random number.

<About various processes executed by MPU82>
Next, each process executed for advancing the game by the MPU 82 of the main control device 71 will be described. The processing of the MPU 82 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S101, the power-on wait process is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until 1 sec elapses after the main process is started. In the following step S102, access to the RAM 84 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the MPU 82 is set.

After that, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch provided in the power supply and the emission control device 78 is manually operated, and in the following step S105, whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag of the RAM 84. Is determined. Further, in step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed, and in the following step S107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined. judge.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, at the start of business of the game hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108 in the same manner. In step S108, the RAM 84 is cleared as the initialization of the RAM 84. Then, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch is not pressed, step S109 without executing the process of step S108, provided that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. Proceed to. In step S109, the power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 84 such as initialization of the power failure flag is set as an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the sound / light control device 300 in order to recognize the current gaming state. do. Further, a payout initialization command indicating that the RAM of the payout control device 77 should be initialized is transmitted to the payout control device 77. Furthermore, interrupt permission is set to allow the occurrence of timer interrupt processing.

After that, the process proceeds to the residual processing of steps S110 to S113. That is, although the MPU 82 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt processing, a residual time is generated between the timer interrupt processing of one and the next timer interrupt processing. This residual time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the residual process of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed by utilizing the irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual processing in steps S110 to S113 is an irregular process that is executed irregularly.

In the residual processing, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In the following step S111, the random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and the variable counter update process for updating the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 in step S112. To execute. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the RAM 84, a process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S113, the interrupt enable setting for switching from the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted is set. After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processes of steps S110 to S113 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing in the MPU 82 will be described. The main control board 81 is provided with a clock circuit as a pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and further, a frequency dividing circuit is provided so as to exist in the middle of the signal path between the clock circuit and the MPU 82. Is provided.

The frequency dividing circuit functions as a frequency changing means for changing the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt process by the MPU 82. That is, the pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 82 at intervals of 4 msec, which is a specific period. The MPU 82 executes a process for confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as a rising edge or a falling edge of the pulse signal, and activates and executes a timer interrupt process on the condition that the occurrence of a specific signal form is confirmed. do.

In this case, when the occurrence of the above specific signal form is confirmed in the situation where the activation of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer is changed from the state in which the interrupt is prohibited to the state in which the interrupt is permitted. Interrupt processing is started. That is, depending on the processing execution status in the MPU 82, the next timer interrupt processing may be started after 4.1 msec has elapsed from the start of the previous timer interrupt processing. If such an event occurs, the next timer interrupt processing may be started. The timer interrupt processing will be started after 3.9 msec has elapsed from the start of the immediately preceding timer interrupt processing.

However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency dividing circuit is performed in a specific cycle such as 4 msec regardless of the progress of the processing in the MPU 82, the timer interrupt processing is basically started in the specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the MPU 82 is the timing next to the predetermined timing even if the timer interrupt processing at the predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific cycle has elapsed since the previous timer interrupt processing was started. In the timer interrupt processing in, the portion exceeding the specific cycle is absorbed, and in the timer interrupt processing in the next timing, it is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed.

In the timer interrupt process, first, the power failure information storage process is executed in step S201. In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 85, and if the occurrence of a power failure is specified, the power failure processing is executed.

In the following step S202, the lottery random number update process is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the jackpot random number counter C1, the support type counter C2, the first reach random number counter C3, the general electric random number counter C4, and the second reach random number counter C5 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the jackpot random number counter C1, the support type counter C2, the first reach random number counter C3, the normal electric random number counter C4, and the second reach random number counter C5, and the read numerical information is read out respectively. After executing the process of adding 1, the process of overwriting the counter of the read source is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively.

After that, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the fluctuation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112. In the following step S205, the game stop determination process is executed. In the game stop determination process, if an illegal act is detected in the timer interrupt process of the previous time or before the previous time, it is determined that the situation should stop the progress of the game, and the process for advancing the game is executed. Stop. The fraud detection process is a process performed in step S211 described later.

After that, in step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped, and the processes after step S207 are executed on condition that the progress of the game is not stopped.

In step S207, the port output process is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, the process for outputting the output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32c and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the large winning opening 32a to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 32c for the special electric power is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal.

Further, when the information for switching the utility accessory 34a of the operating port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for the utility is started, and the information for switching to the closed state is obtained. If it is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

In the following step S208, the reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

In the following step S209, the winning detection process is executed. In the winning detection process, the signals received from the detection sensors 32e, 34c, 35c, 52a, 53a are read, and the general winning opening 31, the large winning opening 32a, the operating opening 34, the through gate 35A, 35B, and the special winning opening 31 are used. A process for specifying whether or not a prize has been won in the mouth 52 and the general winning mouth 53 is executed.

In the following step S210, a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 84 is executed. In this case, the timer counters to which the stored numerical information is subtracted and updated are collectively handled, but both the subtraction type timer counter update and the addition type timer counter update are collectively performed. It may be configured.

In the following step S211, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a fraudulent activity set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred is executed. If the set fraudulent activity has occurred, it is determined that the progress of the game should be stopped in step S205 in the next timer interrupt process.

In the following step S212, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed. In a situation where the firing operation is continued for the firing operation device 28, one game ball is launched every 0.6 sec, which is a predetermined firing cycle, as described above.

In the following step S213, as the input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the read process of step S208, the disconnection confirmation of each detection sensor 32e, 34c, 35c, 52a, 53a, the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame Confirm the opening of 14.

In the following step S214, the special figure special electric control process for performing the execution control of the game times and the execution control of the open / close execution mode is executed, and in step S215, the support lottery for the general electric accessory 34a and the general electric accessory 34a are executed. Executes the Fudoden control process for opening / closing control.

In the following step S216, the output information for updating the display contents of the first special figure display unit 38a and the second special figure display unit 38b is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S214 and S215, and the output information is set. Set the output information for updating the display contents of the normal map display unit 39.

In the following step S217, a demo display process for making the display content of the symbol display device 42 for standby display is executed in a situation where neither the game times nor the open / close execution mode is executed, and in step S218, the display content is executed. , The contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and the payout state reception process for performing the process corresponding to the check result is executed. Further, in step S219, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed.

In the following step S220, in order to switch the state of the signal output to the external terminal board 79 so as to control the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of various processes executed in the timer interrupt processing this time. Executes the external information setting process of. Further, in step S221, a process for editing the test firing test information is executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S206, or after the processes of steps S207 to S221 are executed, the process proceeds to step S222. In step S222, the interrupt end declaration is set. In the MPU 82, once the timer interrupt process is started, it is stipulated that the interrupt end declaration is set as one of the conditions for starting the next timer interrupt process. In step S222, the next timer is set. Set the interrupt end declaration to enable execution of interrupt processing. Further, in step S223, interrupt permission is set. In the MPU 82, once the timer interrupt processing is started, it is set to the interrupt disabled state. Therefore, in step S223, the interrupt permission is set in order to enable the execution of the next timer interrupt processing. After that, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Hereinafter, the special figure special electric control process executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt process will be described, and the normal figure general electric control process executed in step S215 will be described.

<Fuzu Fuden control processing>
First, the Fuzu Fuden control process executed in step S215 will be described.

In the Fuzu Fuden control process, when a prize is won in the through gates 35A and 35B, the process for acquiring the hold information on the Fuzu side is executed, and the hold information on the Fuzu side is stored. If there is, support occurrence determination is performed for the pending information, and further, processing for performing a normal drawing effect is executed with the support occurrence determination as an opportunity. Further, based on the result of the support generation determination, the process of opening and closing the universal electric accessory 34a of the operating port 34 is executed.

By the way, in the Fuzu Fuden control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 14, first, in step S301, the Fuzu side holding information acquisition process is executed. Here, the process of acquiring the reserved information on the normal drawing side will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 15. First, in step S401, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first general drawing winning flag. .. The first general figure winning flag is a flag set when a prize is won in the through gate 35A provided in the left side region PE2 among the through gates 35A and 35B provided in the left side region PE2 and the right side region PE3, and the RAM 84 It is provided in.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S401, the first normal figure winning flag is cleared in step S402, and the first normal figure winning counter is added by 1 in the following step S403. The first general figure winning counter is provided in the RAM 84, and is incremented by 1 each time the initial value is "0" and the first general figure winning flag is set. The first normal figure winning counter counts the number of game balls that have passed through the through gate 35A provided in the left side region PE2, that is, the number of game balls that have passed through the ball passage port 33a.

If a negative determination is made in step S401, it is determined in step S404 whether or not the second general drawing winning flag is set. The second normal figure winning flag is a flag set when a prize is won in the through gate 35B provided in the right side region PE3 among the through gates 35A and 35B provided in the left side region PE2 and the right side region PE3, and the RAM 84 It is provided in.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S404, the second general figure winning flag is cleared in step S405. If a negative determination is made in step S404, the process of acquiring the reserved information on the main drawing side is terminated as it is.

After the execution of step S403 or step S405, it is determined in step S406 whether or not the numerical information of the universal power counter provided in the RAM 84 is "0".

Here, in the Fuzu Fuden control process (FIG. 14) in which the pending information acquisition process on the Fuzu side is performed, as described above, the process related to the effect for the Fuzu and the opening / closing of the Fuden accessory 34a are performed. Such processing is included. In this case, as the processing related to the effect for the normal map, the normal map fluctuation start process (step S307), the normal map changing process (step S308), and the normal map finalizing process (step S309) are set. ing. Further, as the process related to the opening / closing of the utility accessory 34a, the process during opening of the computer (step S310) and the process during closing of the computer (step S311) are set.

In such a processing configuration, the Fuzu Fuden counter is a counter for the MPU 82 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing should be executed, and is provided in the ROM 83. In the address table, the start address in the program for executing the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden counter.

Numerical information from "0" to "4" can be set for the Fuzu Fuden counter, and the Fuzu Fuden address table starts with a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden counter. Address information (“NSA0” to “NSA4”) is set. In this case, the start address NSA0 is the start address of the program for executing the normal map variation start process, and the start address NSA1 is the start address of the program for executing the normal map variation start process, and the start address NSA2. Is the start address of the program for executing the process during confirmation of the normal map, the start address NSA3 is the start address of the program for executing the process during the opening of the normal power, and the start address NSA4 is the closed state of the normal power. The start address of the program for executing the process.

The Fuzu Fuden counter will be used in the next processing round when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is completed. 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or "0" is cleared corresponding to the process executed by the electric control process. Therefore, in the Fuzu Fuden control process at each processing time, it is sufficient to execute the process according to the numerical information set in the Fuzu Fuden counter.

According to the above configuration, it is possible for the MPU 82 to grasp which process should be executed as the normal power control without checking the presence or absence of various flags. Therefore, the processing can be simplified.

That is, the case where the numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden counter is "0" in step S406 is a situation in which the Fuzu fluctuation start process can be executed, and specifically, it is based on the hold information on the Fuzu side. The situation is neither during the game round nor in the support execution mode.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S406, the numerical information of the normal electric random number counter C4, the second reach random number counter C5, and the second variable type counter CS2 is used for the normal figure in the normal figure holding area 106 in the following step S407. Is stored in the execution area 107 of.

If a negative determination is made in step S406, or after the process of step S407 is executed, the process for ceiling counting is executed in steps S408 to S413. Specifically, first, in step S408, it is determined whether or not the value of the first general figure winning counter is "251". That is, in step S408, it is determined whether or not the number of times the game ball has entered the special accessory 33 is about to reach 256 times, which is the ceiling. If an affirmative determination is made in step S408, the ceiling notice command is set as an output target to the sound / light control device 300 in step S409. The various commands set as output targets in the MPU 82 are transmitted to the output destination control device without executing any special processing in the program processing of the MPU 82.

At this time, the determination value (= 251) in step S408 is an intermediate number smaller than the number of ceilings (= 256) for winning the jackpot, and it is possible to set a plurality of numerical values smaller than "256". For example, a plurality of settings such as "241", "246", and "251" may be set, and a ceiling notice command may be set each time the number of times is reached.

When the ceiling warning command is received, the sound / light control device 300 executes a process for setting a sound output pattern and a light control pattern corresponding to the ceiling warning command. Specifically, a data table for ensuring that the effect corresponding to the ceiling notice is performed through the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 65 is read from the ROM 303 of the sound / light control device 300, and the ceiling notice is used according to the read data table. The effect of is performed by the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 65.

In addition, an effect-related command corresponding to the ceiling notice command is transmitted to the display control device 400. The display control device 400 reads a data table for causing the ceiling notice to be performed through the symbol display device 42, and displays the effect for the ceiling notice according to the read data table. Specifically, the effect for the ceiling notice is an effect that informs the player that there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur due to the fact that the next five prizes are generated at the through gate 35A of the left area PE2, for example, a design. A character for ceiling notice appears in an area different from the variable display of columns Z1 to Z3.

When a negative determination is made in step S408 or after the execution of step S409, it is determined in step S410 whether or not the value of the first general figure winning counter is "256". That is, in step S410, the game ball that has entered the special accessory 33 this time is the 256th after the initial value is set in the first general figure winning counter (that is, since the previous winning in the special winning opening 52). It is determined whether or not it is. If a negative determination is made in step S410, the process of acquiring the reserved information on the main drawing side is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S410, the process proceeds to step S411, the first normal figure winning counter is cleared, and the process of acquiring the reserved information on the main normal figure side is completed.

Returning to the description of the Fuzu Fuden control process (FIG. 14), after executing the hold information acquisition process in step S301, the process proceeds to step S302. In step S302, a process of reading the information of the normal drawing counter is executed. In the following step S303, a process of reading the Fuzuden address table is executed. Then, in step S304, the process of acquiring the start address corresponding to the information of the Fuzu Fuden counter is executed from the Fuzu Fuden address table.

As already explained, in the Fuzu Fuden control processing, the Fuzu Fuden counter and the Fuzu Fuden address table are used to perform the Fuzu fluctuation start processing, the Fuzu fluctuation processing, the Fuzu confirmation processing, and the Fuden. Performs processing during opening and processing during closing of the public electric table. Hereinafter, a configuration for executing each of these processes will be described.

First, in step S305, the zero flag setting process on the normal drawing side is executed. In the zero flag setting process on the Fuzu side, the numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden timer counter is read, and when the numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden timer counter is "0", the Fuzu side provided in the register of the MPU 82 The process of setting "1" to the zero flag of is executed. The Fuzu Fuden timer counter is a counter used to specify the update timing of the Fuzu Fuden counter according to the passage of time in the MPU 82, and the numerical information corresponding to the predetermined time is from step S307 to step. It is set in each process of S311, and the update of the numerical information is executed in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13).

In the following step S306, a process of jumping (migrating) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S304 is executed. Specifically, when the acquired start address is NSA0, it jumps to the normal map fluctuation start process in step S307, and when the acquired start address is NSA1, it jumps to the normal map change process in step S308. If the acquired start address is NSA2, it jumps to the process during confirmation of the normal figure in step S309, and if the acquired start address is NSA3, it jumps to the process during opening of the normal power in step S310, and the acquired start is performed. If the address is NSA4, the process jumps to the process of closing the normal electric power in step S311. Then, after executing any of the processes of step S307 to step S311, the present normal power control process is terminated. Hereinafter, the processes of steps S307 to S311 will be described individually.

<Public map fluctuation start processing>
First, the normal map fluctuation start process in step S307 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the normal figure fluctuation start process, first, in step S501, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the high frequency flag provided in the RAM 84. The high-frequency flag is a flag referred to in the MPU 82 when specifying whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode or the low-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode is subsequently set when the open / close execution mode ends. "1" is set when migrating.

Further, in step S502, it is determined whether or not the game count counter provided in the RAM 84 is "0". The game count counter is a counter for the MPU 82 to specify whether or not the game rounds of the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) have been digested in the state of being set to the high frequency support mode. By the way, the end reference number of times is set in the game count counter when the high frequency support mode is set after the end of the open / close execution mode, and the numerical information set in the game count counter is that the game round ends. It is updated so that it is subtracted by 1 based on.

If an affirmative determination is made in both step S501 and step S502, the high frequency flag is cleared in step S503. As a result, the support mode of the Fuden accessory 34a shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. Here, in the Fuzu fluctuation start processing, the numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden counter corresponds to the processing during the opening of the Fuden and the processing during the closing of the Fuden, that is, the Fuden accessory 34a when the support is won. Does not run during support run mode. Therefore, even if the end reference number of games ends during the support execution mode based on the fact that the support was won before the end of the end reference number of games, the support mode is maintained in the high frequency support mode. After the support execution mode ends, it is switched to the low frequency support mode.

In the following step S504, the external output setting process for high frequency cancellation is executed. In the external output setting process, the data of the RAM 84 is set so that the output of the high frequency signal from the external terminal board 79 to the management computer of the game hall is stopped. The output of the high frequency signal is started when the high frequency support mode is entered. Incidentally, the output stop of the high frequency signal is executed by the external information setting process of step S220 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). Further, in step S504, the high frequency end command is set as an output target to the sound / light control device 300. The high-frequency end command is a command for causing the sound / light control device 300 to recognize that the high-frequency support mode has ended.

If a negative determination is made in either step S501 or step S502, or after the process of step S504 is executed, the process proceeds to step S505. In step S505, it is determined whether or not there is pending information on the normal drawing side. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the hold information is stored in the execution area 107 for the normal map in the normal map hold area 106. If there is no hold information, the change start process of this normal diagram is terminated as it is, and if there is hold information, it is determined in step S506 whether or not "1" is set in the high frequency flag. When an affirmative judgment is made in step S506, the high-frequency normal figure hit / fail table is read from the ROM 83 in step S507, and when a negative judgment is made in step S506, the low-frequency normal is used in step S508. Read the figure pass / fail table. After reading the corresponding normal figure pass / fail table in step S507 or step S508, the process proceeds to step S509.

In step S509, the pass / fail determination process is executed. In the hit / fail determination process, the pass / fail determination information stored in the execution area 107 for the normal map, that is, the numerical information related to the normal random number counter C4, is obtained with reference to the normal figure pass / fail table read in step S507 or step S508. It is determined whether or not the result corresponds to any of the results. Specifically, it is determined whether the support winning result or the losing result is applicable.

In the following step S510, the fluctuation display time and the stop result grasping process are executed. When grasping the fluctuation display time, in the low frequency support mode, the current numerical information of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is read, and the numerical information of the fluctuation display time corresponding to the numerical information is read from the corresponding fluctuation display time table. .. More specifically, when the support is won, or when the second reach random number counter C5 corresponds to the reach generation, the variable display time table for the reach generation is read out to determine the variable display time. Further, when the support is not won and the second reach random number counter C5 does not correspond to the reach generation, the variable display time table for non-reach generation is read out to determine the variable display time. On the other hand, in the high frequency support mode, the numerical information of a single variable display time is read out.

Further, when grasping the stop result, the information of the stop result to be displayed on the normal map display unit 39 corresponding to the case where the game round to be started this time is completed is read from the ROM 83. In this case, the stop result information according to the content of the pass / fail result is read out.

In the following step S511, the numerical information of the fluctuation display time read in step S510 is set in the normal-figure timer counter.

In the following step S512, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric counter is "0". The situation in which the special figure special electric counter is "0" is a situation in which the game rotation based on the hold information on the special figure side is not in progress and the open / close execution mode is not in progress. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S512, in step S513, the content of the variation display time, the content of the result of success / failure, and the command for variation and the type command according to the content of the distribution result are sent to the sound / light control device 300. Set as the output target of. The variation command includes information on the variation display time. In addition, the type command includes information on the game result.

When a negative determination is made in step S512 or after the process of step S513 is executed, the variation display is started in the normal map display unit 39 of the current variation start target in step S514. In the following step S515, the Fuzu Fuden counter is incremented by 1. As a result, the numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden counter is updated from "0" to "1". After that, the process of starting the fluctuation of this normal map is terminated.

As described above, when a negative determination is made in step S512, a variation command and a type command according to the content of the variation display time, the content of the pass / fail result, and the content of the distribution result are sent to the sound / light control device 300. Since the configuration is not set as the output target of, while the effect for the game round based on the hold information on the special map side is being executed, the effect for the game round based on the hold information on the normal map side is executed. It is possible to prevent the normal map sub-variation from starting while the normal map main fluctuation starts.

<Processing during fluctuation of normal map>
The processing during the fluctuation of the normal map in step S298 in the normal drawing control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to FIG.

In the process during fluctuation of the normal map, first, in step S601, it is confirmed whether or not "1" is set in the zero flag on the normal map side provided in the register of the MPU 82. Determine if the variable display time has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S601, the process proceeds to step S602.

In step S602, it is determined whether or not it is the update timing of the normal map display unit 39, which is the target of the variable display in the effect for the game round this time. If it is not the update timing, the processing during the change of this map is terminated as it is. If it is the update timing, the update content is read out in step S603. The updated contents are stored in the ROM 83 as an update data table, and in step S603, the updated contents corresponding to the update timing are read from the data table.

In the following step S604, the update content read in step S603 is set for the update of the normal map display unit 39 this time. Incidentally, the process for actually updating the display content of the normal figure display unit 39 is executed in the display control process of step S206 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). After that, the processing during the change of this map is terminated.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S601, it is determined in step S605 whether or not the special figure special electric counter is "0", as in step S512 of the normal figure fluctuation start processing (FIG. 16). .. If an affirmative determination is made in step S605, the final stop command for normal drawing is set as an output target to the sound / light control device 300. The final stop command is a command for causing the sound / light control device 300 to recognize that it is the timing to start the final stop display for the effect for this game round.

When the sound / light control device 300 receives the final stop command, the sound / light control device 300 executes a process for setting a sound output pattern and a light control pattern corresponding to the final stop command. Specifically, a data table for causing the effect corresponding to the final stop display to be performed through the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 65 is read from the ROM 303 of the sound / light control device 300, and the final stop is performed according to the read data table. The display effect is performed by the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 65. Such a data table corresponds to the final downtime.

Further, the effect system command corresponding to the final stop command is transmitted to the display control device 400. In the display control device 400, a data table for causing the final stop display to be performed through the symbol display device 42 from the command is read from the program ROM 403 of the display control device 400, and the read data table is used for the current game round. The stop result in the production is displayed as the final stop.

If a negative determination is made in step S605 or after the execution of step S606, the process proceeds to step S607. In step S607, the stop result reading process is executed. In the read process, the information of the stop result set in the RAM 84 in step S510 of the normal figure variation start process (FIG. 16) is read at the start of the game round this time. In the following step S608, the read stop result information is set for updating the normal map display unit 39 corresponding to the effect for the game round this time.

In the following step S609, the information of a single final stop time (for example, 0.6 sec) stored in advance in the ROM 83 is read out, and the information of the final stop time is set in the general-purpose timer counter. After that, in step S610, the normal figure normal electric counter is added by 1, and then the process during the change of the normal figure is terminated. In this case, the numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden counter is updated from "1" to "2".

As described above, when a negative determination is made in step S605, the final stop command for the normal drawing is not set as an output target to the sound / light control device 300, so that the special drawing side is suspended. While the effect for the game round based on the information is being executed on the symbol display device 42, the normal map main variation ends but the normal map sub-variation ends as the game round effect based on the hold information on the normal map side. It is possible to avoid it.

<Processing during confirmation of normal map>
In the process of confirming the normal figure in step S309 in the normal figure normal control process (FIG. 14), as shown in the flowchart of FIG. Determines whether the set final stop time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the zero flag for the determination process.

If the final stop time has not passed, the process of confirming this normal figure is terminated as it is, and if the final stop time has passed, the support that triggered this fluctuation display is performed in step S702. It is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination is the support winning. If the support is not won, in step S703, after clearing the numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden counter to "0", the process of confirming this Fuzu is terminated. If the support is won, the process proceeds to step S704.

In step S704, "1" is set in the general electricity release counter provided in the RAM 84, and "10" is set in the general electricity winning counter provided in the RAM 84 in step S506. The Fuden release counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of times of opening of the Fuden accessory 34a in the support execution mode by the MPU 82, and the Fuden winning counter is a counter in which the operating port 34 is won in the support execution mode this time. It is a counter for specifying by MPU 82 whether or not it has occurred for the upper limit number.

In the following step S706, a process of setting "1" to the support flag provided in the RAM 84 is executed. The support flag is a flag for the MPU 82 to specify that the support execution mode is in progress, and is cleared by the normal electric closing process (step S301) at the end of the support execution mode.

After the process of step S706 is executed, in the following step S707, the numerical information of the open duration (specifically, 5 sec) is set in the normal-figure-conventional timer counter.

That is, in the present embodiment, the support execution mode ends depending on whether the upper limit number of 10 game balls wins the operating port 34 or 5 sec elapses. In this case, since the opening duration is set longer than the firing cycle, at least one prize can be expected, but the product of the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball and the upper limit number is larger than the opening duration. Because it is short, you cannot expect to win the maximum number of game balls. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the ball ejection and suppress the gambling spirit while enabling the winning of the operating port 34, which triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode when the support is won.

In the following step S708, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric counter is "0", as in step S512 of the normal map fluctuation start process (FIG. 16) and step S605 of the normal map change process (FIG. 17). ..

If an affirmative determination is made in step S708, the opening command is set as an output target to the sound / light control device 300 in step S709. The opening command is a command for causing the sound / light control device 300 to recognize that the support winning result is obtained and the general electric accessory 34a shifts from the closed state to the open state.

When the sound / light control device 300 receives the opening command for normal drawing, the sound / light control device 300 executes a process for setting a sound output pattern and a light control pattern corresponding to the opening command. Specifically, in order to perform an effect corresponding to the transition of the general electric accessory 34a from the closed state to the open state as a result of the support winning result through the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 65. The data table of the above is read from the ROM 303 of the sound / light control device 300, and the effect for the support execution mode is performed by the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 65 according to the read data table.

In addition, an effect-related command corresponding to the opening command is transmitted to the display control device 400. In the display control device 400, from the command, the effect corresponding to the transition of the general electric accessory 34a from the closed state to the open state when the support winning result is obtained is performed through the symbol display device 42. The data table for the purpose is read from the program ROM 403 of the display control device 400, and the effect for the support execution mode is executed by the symbol display device 42 according to the read data table.

When a negative determination is made in step S708 or after the execution of step S709, the normal figure fluctuation start process is terminated after the normal figure normal electric counter is incremented by 1 in step S710. In this case, the numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden counter is updated from "2" to "3".

As described above, when a negative determination is made in step S708, the opening command for the normal drawing is not set as an output target to the sound / light control device 300, so that the holding information on the special drawing side is set. While the effect for the game round based on the above is being executed on the symbol display device 42, it is possible to prevent the effect for the support execution mode based on the hold information on the normal drawing side from being executed.

<Processing while the public power is open>
In the process during the opening of the normal power in step S310 in the normal power control process (FIG. 14), a process for maintaining the open state of the normal power accessory 34a is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening duration of the general electric accessory 34a has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in the determination, it is determined whether or not the upper limit number (specifically, 10) of game balls has won the operating port 34. If a negative determination is made in the determination of the number of winnings, or if the winning to the operating port 34 is not detected, the processing during opening of the general electric power is terminated as it is. In addition, when the opening duration has elapsed or when the upper limit number has been won, the numerical information of the general electric opening counter is updated to be subtracted by 1, and when the numerical information of the general electric opening counter is "0". Exits support execution mode. Then, after adding 1 to the numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden counter, the processing during the opening of the Fuden is terminated. In this case, the numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden counter is updated from "3" to "4".

<Processing while the public train is closed>
In the process during closing of the computer in step S311 in the process of controlling the computer (FIG. 14), the process for shifting the function 34a from the open state to the closed state is executed. After that, clear the Fuzu Fuden counter to "0".

<Special figure special electric control processing>
Next, the special figure special electric control process executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) will be described.

In the special figure special electric control process, a process for acquiring the hold information on the special figure side is executed when a prize is generated in the operating port 34 or the special winning opening 52, and the hold information on the special figure side is stored. If so, a hit / fail determination for a special figure is performed for the reserved information, and further, a process for performing a game rotation effect is executed with the hit / fail determination as an opportunity. Further, based on the result of the hit / fail determination, the process of shifting to the open / close execution mode is executed after the effect for the game round. Further, the process in the open / close execution mode is executed. However, in the present embodiment, the number of holdable prizes (the number of holdable numbers on the special drawing side) for each of the winning openings 34 and the special winning opening 52 is "1", and one has already won the first prize. In the state where the hold information is stored in the special figure hold area 103 and the second special figure hold area 104, the hold based on the subsequent second prize is not performed.

By the way, in the special figure special electric control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 19, first, in step S801, the acquisition process of the reserved information on the special figure side is executed. Here, the process of acquiring the reserved information on the special figure side will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 20. First, in step S901, "1" is set in the first special figure winning flag provided in the RAM 84. Determine if it is. The first special figure winning flag is set when the winning of the special winning opening 52 is specified in the winning detection process of step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13).

When "1" is set in the first special figure winning flag, the first special figure winning flag is cleared in step S902. In the following step S903, it is determined whether or not the total number PS1 of the reserved information on the first special figure side stored in the first special figure holding area 103 is "0". If it is "0", in step S904, the total number PS1 of the reserved information on the first special figure side is added by 1, and in step S905, the jackpot random number counter C1 updated in the immediately preceding step S202 is supported. Each numerical information of the type counter C2 and the first reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first special figure holding area 103.

If a negative determination is made in step S901, a negative determination is made in step S903, or the process of step S905 is executed, the process proceeds to step S906. In step S906, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second special figure winning flag provided in the RAM 84. The second special figure winning flag is set when the winning of the operating port 34 is specified in the winning detection process of step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13).

If "1" is not set in the second special figure winning flag, the acquisition process is terminated as it is, and if "1" is set in the second special figure winning flag, the second step S907 is performed. Clear the special figure winning flag. In the following step S908, it is determined whether or not the total number PS2 of the reserved information on the second special figure side stored in the second special figure holding area 104 is "0". If it is "0", it is determined in step S909 whether or not "1" is set in the second special figure execution flag provided in the RAM 84. The second special figure execution flag is set when the hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 104 is moved to the execution area 105 for special figure, and the end of the special figure sub-variation based on the hold information. This is a flag that is cleared at the time of, or when the mode is changed to the open / close execution mode based on the hold information.

If "1" is not set in the second special figure execution flag, the total number PS2 of the reserved information on the second special figure side is added by 1 in step S910. In the following step S911, the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the support type counter C2, and the first reach random number counter C3 updated in the immediately preceding step S192 is stored in the second special figure holding area 104.

If a negative determination is made in step S908 or step S909, or after the execution of step S910, the acquisition process ends.

Returning to the description of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 19), after executing the hold information acquisition process on the special figure side in step S801, the process proceeds to step S802. In step S802, a process of reading the information of the special figure special electric counter provided in the RAM 84 is executed. In the following step S803, a process of reading the special figure special electric address table from the ROM 83 is executed. Then, in step S804, the process of acquiring the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electric counter from the special figure special electric address table is executed.

Here, the processing contents of steps S802 to S804 will be described.

As already described, the special figure special electric control process includes a process related to the effect for playing the game and a process related to the opening / closing execution mode. In this case, as the processing related to the effect for the game round, the special figure variation start process (step S807), which is the process for starting the effect for the game round, and the process for advancing the effect for the game round. A certain special figure changing process (step S808) and a special figure finalizing process (step S809), which is a process for ending the effect for the game round, are set. Further, as the processes related to the open / close execution mode, the special electric start process (step S810), which is a process for controlling the opening of the open / close execution mode, and the special electric, which is a process for controlling the open state of the large winning opening 32a. Opening process (step S811), special electric closing process (step S812), which is a process for controlling the closed state of the large winning opening 32a, and the ending of the open / close execution mode and the gaming state at the end of the open / close execution mode. The special electric power termination process (step S813), which is a process for controlling the transition of the above, is set.

In such a processing configuration, the special figure special electric counter is a counter for grasping which of the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing should be executed by the MPU 82, and the special figure special electric address table has a special figure. Corresponding to the numerical information of the special electric counter, the start address in the program for executing the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing is set.

Explaining the special figure special electric address table, the special figure special electric counter can set the numerical information of "0" to "6", and the special figure special electric address table has one pair for each numerical information of the special figure special electric counter. Information on the start address (“PSA0” to “PSA6”) is set in correspondence with 1. In this case, the start address PSA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure change start process, and the start address PSA1 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure change process, and the start address PSA2. Is the start address of the program for executing the special figure fixing process, the start address PSA3 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric start process, and the start address PSA4 executes the special electric open process. The start address PSA5 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric closed processing, and the start address PSA6 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric end processing. ..

The special figure special electric counter controls the special figure special electric power in the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed. It is updated according to the process executed in the process. Therefore, in the special figure special electric control processing in each processing time, it is sufficient to execute the processing according to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric counter.

Below, using the special figure special electric counter and special figure special electric address table, special figure fluctuation start processing, special figure fluctuation processing, special figure confirmation processing, special electric power start processing, special electric power opening processing, special electric power closing processing and The processing configuration for executing the special electric termination processing will be described, and the processing configuration of each processing will be specifically described.

After executing the process of step S804, the process of setting the zero flag on the special figure side is executed in step S805. In the process of setting the zero flag on the special figure side, the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is read, and when the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", the zero flag on the special figure side provided in the register of the MPU 82 is set. Executes the process of setting "1" to. The special figure special electric timer counter is a counter used for specifying the update timing of the special figure special electric counter according to the passage of time by the MPU 82, and the numerical information corresponding to the predetermined time is in steps S807 to S813. It is set in each process, and the numerical information is updated in the timer update process in step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13).

In the following step S806, a process of jumping (migrating) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S804 is executed. Specifically, when the acquired start address is PSA0, it jumps to the special figure change start process of step S807, and when the acquired start address is PSA1, it jumps to the special figure change process in step S808. If the acquired start address is PSA2, the process jumps to the special figure determination process in step S809, and if the acquired start address is PSA3, the process jumps to the special electric start process in step S810, and the acquired start address is If it is PSA4, it jumps to the processing during opening of the special electric power in step S811, if the acquired start address is PSA5, it jumps to the processing during closing of the special electric power of step S812, and if the acquired start address is PSA6. Jump to the special electric end processing of step S813. When the processes of steps S807 to S813 are executed, the special figure special electric control process is terminated.

Hereinafter, the processes of steps S807 to S813 will be described individually.

In the special figure change start process executed in step S807, the hold information on the special figure side is held and stored (at least one of PS1 and PS2 is 1), and the hold information is a big hit. The winning / failing determination process for determining whether or not the winning is supported is executed. If the reserved information on the special figure side is not stored on hold, the special figure change start processing is terminated as it is.

In addition to the hit / fail determination process, if the hold information does not correspond to the jackpot winning, the reach determination process for determining whether the hold information corresponds to the reach occurrence is executed, and at that time. The selection process of the duration for selecting the duration of the game round is executed by using the numerical information of the first variation type counter CS1 in the above. Then, the variation command including the duration information and the type command including the game result information are transmitted to the sound / light control device 300, and the pattern on the first special figure display unit 38a or the second special figure display unit 38b is transmitted. Start variable display. As a result, one game round is started, and the special figure display unit 38 and the symbol display device 42 start the effect for the game round. After that, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is updated from "0" to "1" by adding 1 to the special figure special electric counter.

In the special figure changing process executed in step S808, it is determined whether or not the display continuation time in the effect for the current game round has elapsed. If an affirmative judgment is made in the judgment, a confirmation command is set as an output target. The confirmation command is a command for causing the sound / light control device 300, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that it is the timing to start the confirmation display for the current game rotation effect. After that, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is updated from "1" to "2" by adding 1 to the special figure special electric counter. Further, if the display duration in the effect for this game round has not elapsed, the display content of the special figure display unit 38 is updated, and the value of the special figure special electric counter is not updated. The processing during the change of this special figure is terminated.

In the special figure finalizing process executed in step S809, it is determined whether or not the fixed time in the production for the current game round has elapsed. If an affirmative judgment is made in the judgment, it is determined whether or not the hit / fail judgment result that triggered the game round this time was a big hit result. If the hit / fail determination result is a big hit result, the opening command is set as the output target and the opening time is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. The opening command is a command for causing the sound / light control device 300, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that it is the timing to start the effect for the open / close execution mode. After that, by adding 1 to the special figure special electric counter, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is updated from "2" to "3", and the processing during the determination of this special figure is terminated. In addition, if the result of the hit / fail judgment that triggered the game round this time is a wrong result, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0", and the processing during the determination of this special figure is terminated.

In the special electric start processing executed in step S810, it is determined whether or not the opening time in the opening / closing execution mode of this time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in the determination, information on the opening duration is set, and an opening setting process for setting the large winning opening 32a to the open state is executed. After that, by adding 1 to the special figure special electric counter, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is updated from "3" to "4", and the special electric special electric start processing is terminated. If the opening time has not passed, the special electric train start process is terminated as it is.

In the special electric opening processing performed in step S811, it is determined whether or not the opening duration in the current round game has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in the determination, it is determined whether or not the upper limit number (specifically, 10) of game balls has won the large winning opening 32a in the current round game. If a negative judgment is made in the determination of the number of winnings, or if the winning of the large winning opening 32a is not detected, the processing during opening of the special electric power is terminated as it is. If the open duration has elapsed or the maximum number of prizes has been won in the current round game, the round counter provided in the RAM 84 that stores the number of rounds is decremented by 1, and then the closing time information is set. The closing setting process for closing the winning opening 32a is executed. After that, by adding 1 to the special figure special electric counter, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is updated from "4" to "5", and the processing during the opening of this special electric power is terminated.

In the special electric closing processing executed in step S812, it is determined whether or not all the round games in the opening / closing execution mode of this time have been completed. If a negative judgment is made in the judgment, the upper limit number of winnings (specifically, 10) to the large winning opening 32a in the round game is set in the special figure winning counter provided in the RAM 84, and the information on the opening time is set. Is set, and the opening setting process for opening the large winning opening 32a is executed.

If the round game is not completed, it is determined whether or not the closing time of the large winning opening 32a has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in the determination, the upper limit number of winnings in the round game is set, and the opening time setting process of the large winning opening 32a is executed. After that, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is updated from "5" to "4" by subtracting 1 from the special figure special electric counter, and the processing during the closure of this special electric power is terminated. If the closing time of the large winning opening 32a has not passed, the processing during closing of this special electric train is terminated as it is.

If the round game is over, set the ending command as the output target. The ending command is a command for causing the sound / light control device 300, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that it is the timing to start the ending effect. After that, by adding 1 to the special figure special electric counter, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is updated from "5" to "6", and the processing during the closure of this special electric power is terminated.

In the special electric end processing executed in step S813, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in the determination, the gaming state is confirmed by referring to the flag of the RAM 84, and the support mode corresponding to the confirmed gaming state is set. After that, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0", and the special electric electric end processing is terminated.

<Special figure change start processing>
Next, the special figure fluctuation start process in step S807 will be specifically described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the hold information is stored in the first special figure hold area 103 or the second special figure hold area 104. If none of the pending information is stored, the special figure change start process is terminated as it is. If the hold information is stored in any of them, the data setting process is executed in step S1002.

In the data setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 104. If a negative determination is made, in step S1102, the total number PS1 of the reserved information on the first special drawing side is cleared to "0". In the following step S1103, the hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 103 is moved to the execution area 105 for the special figure.

After that, in step S1104, the second special figure flag provided in the RAM 84 is cleared. The second special figure flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the execution target for the game round is the hold information acquired based on the winning of the operating port 34. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, the total number PS2 of the reserved information on the second special drawing side is cleared to "0" in step S1105. In the following step S1106, the hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 104 is moved to the execution area 105 for the special figure. In the following step S1107, "1" is set in the second special figure execution flag. In the following step S1108, "1" is set in the second special figure flag. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

By performing the determination process of step S1101 first as described above, when the hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 104, it is stored in the first special figure hold area 103. The hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 104 has priority over the hold information as the target of the hit / fail determination (that is, the target for starting the game round).

Returning to the description of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 21), after executing the process of step S1002, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1003, by determining whether or not the second special figure flag is "0", the change start target is based on the hold information acquired when the special winning opening 52 is won. 1 It is determined whether or not the information is on hold on the special drawing side).

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S1003, the hit / fail table for the first special figure and the distribution table for the first special figure are read from the ROM 83 in step S1004, and when a negative judgment is made in step S1003. In step S1005, the pass / fail table for the second special figure and the distribution table for the second special figure are read from the ROM 83. In step S1005, the high frequency flag is confirmed, the level of the support mode is grasped, and the distribution table corresponding to the grasped support mode is read out. After executing the process of step S1004 or step S1005, the process proceeds to step S1006.

In step S1006, the pass / fail determination process is executed. In the hit / fail determination process, the hit / fail table read in step S1004 or step S1005 is referred to, and among the reserved information stored in the execution area 105 for the special figure, the hit / fail determination information, that is, the numerical value related to the jackpot random number counter C1. It is determined which result the information corresponds to. Specifically, it is determined whether the result is a big hit result or a missed result.

In the following step S1007, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination process in step S1006 corresponds to the big hit winning, and if so, the process proceeds to step S1008.

In step S1008, the distribution determination process is executed. In the distribution determination process, the distribution table read in step S1004 or step S1005 is referred to, and among the reserved information stored in the execution area 105 for special drawing, the information for distribution determination, that is, the support type counter C2 It is determined which distribution result corresponds to the numerical information related to. Specifically, it is determined whether the result corresponds to a high frequency result or a low frequency result.

In the following step S1009, it is determined whether or not the result of the distribution determination process in step S1008 is a low frequency result. If the result is low frequency, "1" is set in the low frequency result flag provided in the RAM 84 in step S1010. If the result is not a low frequency result, "1" is set in the high frequency result flag in step S1011.

If the jackpot winning is not supported in step S1007, the second special figure executing flag is confirmed in step S1012, and if "1" is set, it is cleared and not set. If so, maintain that state.

After the processing of step S1010, step S1011 or step S1012 is executed, the acquisition information setting processing is executed in step S1013, and then the special figure variation start processing is terminated.

Here, the acquisition information setting process in step S1013 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1201, the process of grasping the fluctuation display time and the stop result is executed. When grasping the fluctuation display time, grasp the height of the support mode and grasp the numerical information of the corresponding single fluctuation display time. However, even in the low-frequency support mode, if the support execution mode is in progress, the numerical information of the single variable display time corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is grasped. That is, in the low frequency support mode, for example, when the support execution mode is entered based on the winning of the through gate 35A and the operating port 34 is won, the variable display time in the high frequency support mode (0. 64 sec) is selected. As a result, it is possible to suppress the delay due to the long variable display time in the winning of the operating port 34, which is a result of almost a big hit.

Further, when grasping the stop result, the information of the stop result to be displayed on the special figure display units 38a and 38b corresponding to the case where the game round to be started this time is completed is read from the ROM 83. In this case, the content of the hit / fail result and the information of the stop result according to the content of the distribution result are read out. In the following step S1202, the numerical information of the fluctuation display time read in step S1201 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter.

In the following step S1203, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the support flag. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S1203 is the case where the hold information this time corresponds to the winning of the operating opening 34 or the special winning opening 52 generated in the support execution mode. In the case of making a negative determination in step S1203, that is, in the case of corresponding to the winning of the operating port 34 or the special winning opening 52 generated in a mode other than the support execution mode, in the following step S1204, the content of the variable display time and the result of winning / failing are determined. The variable command and the type command according to the content and the content of the distribution result are set as output targets to the sound / light control device 300. The variation command includes information on the variation display time. In addition, the type command includes information on the game result.

When the sound / light control device 300 receives the fluctuation command and the type command, the sound / light control device 300 executes a process for setting a sound output pattern and a light control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation command and the type command. Specifically, a data table for causing the effect corresponding to the current game times to be performed through the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 65 is read from the program ROM 403 of the sound / light control device 300, and the read data table is followed. The display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 65 perform the effect for the game round. Such a data table corresponds to the variable display time of the game times this time.

In addition, the effect-related commands corresponding to the current fluctuation command and the type command are transmitted to the display control device 400. The display control device 400 grasps the type of the effect for this game round from the command, and displays a data table for the display control device 400 so that the display effect corresponding to the type is performed through the symbol display device 42. It is read from the program ROM 403, and the effect for playing the game is performed by the symbol display device 42 according to the read data table.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1203, or after the process of step S1204 is executed, the variation display is started on the special figure display units 38a and 38b of the current variation start target in step S1205. In the following step S1206, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1. As a result, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is updated from "0" to "1". After that, the acquisition information setting process is terminated.

As described above, when a negative determination is made in step S1203, a variation command and a type command according to the content of the variation display time, the content of the pass / fail result, and the content of the distribution result are sent to the sound / light control device 300. Since the configuration is not set as the output target of, as the effect based on the hold information on the special map side acquired in the support execution mode, the special map main fluctuation starts, but the special map sub fluctuation starts. It is possible to prevent it from being done. This is because when the transition to the support execution mode is performed, the same symbol combination is already formed in the normal map sub-variation, and in such a case, the same effect is performed in the special map sub-variation. By not having it, it is possible to prevent the production from being delayed.

<Special train end processing>
Next, the special electric stop processing in step S813 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 19) will be specifically described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.

In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed by confirming whether or not "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the MPU 82. If the ending time has not elapsed, the special electric train termination process is terminated as it is, and if the ending time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1302.

In step S1302, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the high frequency result flag of the RAM 84. As described above, the high-frequency result flag is set to "1" when one of the jackpot results is obtained in the hit / miss determination process on the special figure side and the high-frequency result is obtained in the distribution determination process.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, "1" is set in the high frequency flag of the RAM 84 in step S1303. If "1" is already set in the high frequency flag, that state is maintained. As a result, the support mode after the open / close execution mode becomes the high frequency support mode. Further, in the following step S1304, the end reference number of times "100" is set in the game number counter of the RAM 84.

After that, in step S1305, the external output setting process of the high frequency signal is executed. In the external output setting process, the data of the RAM 84 is set so that the output of the high frequency signal from the external terminal board 79 to the management computer of the game hall is started. This makes it possible to recognize that the management computer of the game hall is in the high frequency support mode. Incidentally, the output start of the high frequency signal is executed by the external information setting process in step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). Further, in step S1305, a high-frequency command is set as an output target to the sound / light control device 300. The high-frequency command is a command for causing the sound / light control device 300 to recognize that the high-frequency support mode has been entered.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1302, the high frequency flag of the RAM 84 is cleared in step S1306. If the high frequency flag is already "0", that state is maintained. As a result, the support mode after the open / close execution mode becomes the low frequency support mode. Further, in the following step S1307, the game count counter of the RAM 84 is cleared to "0".

After that, in step S1308, the external output setting process for high frequency cancellation is executed. In the external output setting process, the same process as in step S504 in the normal map fluctuation start process (FIG. 16) is executed.

After executing the process of step S1305 or step S1308, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" in step S1309, and the flag clear process is executed in step S1310, and then the special electric end process is performed. To finish. In the flag clearing process, a process of clearing the second special figure flag, the high frequency result flag, the low frequency result flag, and the second special figure executing flag is executed.

<Production determination process executed by the sound / light control device 300>
Next, the staging determination process executed by the sound / light control device 300 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The effect determination process is periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) started by the sound / light control device 300.

First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the change command and the type command at the time of the change of the normal figure (at the time of winning the normal figure) are received. When these commands are received, it is determined in step S1402 whether or not the low frequency support mode is in progress. In the MPU 302 of the sound and light control device 300, in the command correspondence process started every time a command is received, the high frequency flag provided in the RAM 304 is set to "1" by receiving the high frequency command from the MPU 82 of the main control device 71. Is set, and the high frequency flag is cleared by receiving the high frequency release command from the MPU 82 of the main controller 71. In step S1402, by confirming the high frequency flag, it is possible to determine whether or not the low frequency support mode is in progress. In the high-frequency support mode, the process of receiving the change command and the type command at the time of normal map change in steps S1403 to S1405 is not performed.

If the low frequency support mode is set in step S1402, a predetermined symbol determination process is executed in the following step S1403 based on the content of the type command for when the normal map changes. In this case, the combination of the stop symbols is determined according to whether or not the game result of the game times started this time is the support winning. Specifically, in the case of a support win, the combination of stop symbols is determined so that the same symbol combination is formed on one of the effective lines, and if the support is not won, on any effective line. Also, the combination of stop symbols is determined so that the same combination of symbols is not formed.

After that, in step S1404, a process for determining the effect pattern of the current game times is executed. In this case, by referring to the effect table for fluctuations in the normal map stored in advance in the ROM 303 of the sound / light control device 300, the variation display time corresponding to the variation command and the type command received this time (effect continuation). Select the period) and select the content of the production. In the sound / light control device 300, according to the effect pattern determined in step S1404, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 63 in the current game round accompanying the winning of the normal figure is executed, and the output control of the speaker unit 65 is executed.

In the following step S1405, the stop result command corresponding to the processing result of step S1403 and the pattern command corresponding to the processing result of step S1404 are transmitted to the display control device 400. Based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the display control device 400 reads out a data table for performing the effect for this game round on the symbol display device 42 from the program ROM 403 in the display control device 400. According to the data table, a drawing list is output to the VDP 405 in the display control device 400 every time a predetermined image update timing is reached (for example, at a cycle of 20 msec). As a result, in the symbol display device 42, the effect for the game round is executed according to the effect pattern determined by the sound / light control device 300, and the determined stop result is finally stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, if the high frequency support mode is used instead of the low frequency support mode in step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1406. In step S1406, it is determined whether or not the support is won based on the content of the type command received this time. If the support is won, the jackpot notification process is executed in step S1407.

The jackpot notification process is a process for performing jackpot notification when shifting to the support execution mode or the open / close execution mode during the high frequency support mode. As already explained, there is no sub-variation in the normal map during the high frequency support mode. Then, the above-mentioned jackpot notification is performed only in the game times when the mode shifts to the support execution mode or the open / close execution mode. Specifically, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 63 is executed and the output control of the speaker unit 65 is executed so as to perform an effect corresponding to the jackpot notification. Further, in step S1407, a jackpot notification command is output to the display control device 400. Based on the received jackpot notification command, the display control device 400 reads out a data table for performing the jackpot notification effect on the symbol display device 42 from the program ROM 403, and sets a predetermined image update timing according to the data table. The drawing list is output to VDP405 each time.

If a negative determination is made in step S1401 or step S1406, or after the process of step S1405 or step S1407 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1408. In step S1408, it is determined whether or not the change command and the type command at the time of the special figure change (at the time of winning the special figure) are received. When these commands are received, it is determined in the following step S1409 whether or not the low frequency support mode is in progress. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S1402.

In the low frequency support mode, in step S1410, it is determined whether or not the normal map sub-variation is being executed based on the change command and the type command at the time of the normal map change.

If the normal map sub-variation is not being executed, in step S1411, a predetermined symbol determination process is executed based on the content of the type command for the special map variation. In this case, the combination of the stop symbols is determined according to whether or not the game result of the game times started this time is a big hit result. Specifically, in the case of a jackpot result, the combination of stop symbols is determined so that the same symbol combination is formed on one of the effective lines, and if it is not a jackpot result, it is on any effective line. Also, the combination of stop symbols is determined so that the same combination of symbols is not formed.

After that, in step S1412, a process for determining the effect pattern of the current game times is executed. In this case, by referring to the effect table for special figure fluctuation stored in advance in the ROM 303 of the sound / light control device 300, the variation display time corresponding to the variation command and the type command received this time (effect continuation). Select the period) and select the content of the production. In the sound / light control device 300, according to the effect pattern determined in step S1412, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 63 in the current game round accompanying the winning of the normal figure is executed, and the output control of the speaker unit 65 is executed.

Here, the effect table for changing the normal map and the effect table for changing the special map will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 26.

As the effect table stored in the ROM 303 for fluctuations in the normal map, the addresses As (1) to As (x) referenced by the MPU 302 are associated with the effect patterns Ds (1) to Ds (x) on a one-to-one basis. Has been done. Further, as the effect table for changing the special figure, the addresses Ap (1) to Ap (y) referred to by the MPU 302 and the effect patterns Dp (1) to Dp (y) are associated one-to-one. Then, in step S1404 or step S1412, the effect pattern for the game round is determined by referring to the received variation command and the type command and referring to the address corresponding to these commands.

In the following step S1413, the stop result command corresponding to the processing result of step S1411 and the pattern command corresponding to the processing result of step S1412 are transmitted to the display control device 400. Based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the display control device 400 reads out a data table for performing the effect for this game round on the symbol display device 42 from the program ROM 403 in the display control device 400. According to the data table, a drawing list is output to the VDP 405 in the display control device 400 every time a predetermined image update timing is reached (for example, at a cycle of 20 msec). As a result, in the symbol display device 42, the effect for the game round is executed according to the effect pattern determined by the sound / light control device 300, and the determined stop result is finally stopped and displayed.

If the normal map sub-variation is being executed in step S1410, the process proceeds to step S1414.

Here, when the sound / light control device 300 receives the change command and the type command when the special figure changes, the sound / light control device 300 receives the change command and the type command when the normal figure changes immediately before that. If the symbol display device 42 is performing the symbol fluctuation effect (normal map sub-variation) for the normal symbol change, the symbol display device 42 requests the symbol change based on the normal symbol control. The request for the symbol change based on the special figure special electric control will be duplicated. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S1410, and the sound / light control device 300 changes the effect pattern of the symbol display device 42 from the one based on the previously generated request for the normal / normal electric control to the special figure special electric. The process for replacing with the one based on the control request is executed in step S1414 and step S1415.

In step S1414, it is determined whether or not the running normal map sub-variation corresponds to the support winning. If it corresponds to the support winning, the process for replacing it with the one based on the request of special figure special electric control is not performed. That is, even if the request for the symbol change based on the Fu-zu and Fuden control overlaps with the request for the symbol change based on the special figure and Tokuden control, the request for the symbol change based on the Fu-zu and Fuden control wins the support. If there is a request for the corresponding symbol change, it will not be replaced with the one based on the request for special figure special electric control.

This is because the combination formation of the same symbol is finally stopped and the game round ends regardless of whether the mode shifts to the support execution mode or the open / close execution mode. This is because there is no need to replace it in such a situation.

Further, in this case, the symbol change is not performed based on the request of the special figure special electric control. That is, if the sub-variation of the normal map corresponding to the ceiling happens to correspond to the support winning, the main variation of the special map will be performed but the sub-variation of the special map will not be performed even if the special winning opening 52 is subsequently won. .. This is because the winning / failing lottery on the special figure side has a big hit result with a probability of almost 100%, and even though the notification corresponding to the big hit result (formation of the same symbol combination) has already been made, the same result will be notified. Therefore, it is a device to prevent the player from being confused.

As described above, even when the ball enters the operation port 34 during the support execution mode in the low frequency support mode, only the notification corresponding to the transition to the support execution mode is similarly performed. However, even in these situations, the configuration may be such that the special figure side is notified. If the winning probability on the special figure side is set low, the probability that the open / close execution mode will not be entered even if the support execution mode is entered increases, so it is meaningful to notify the special figure side.

If the normal map sub-variation being executed in step S1414 does not correspond to the support winning, in the following step S1415, the staging replacement process is executed as a process for replacing with the one based on the request for the special figure special electric control. ..

In the effect replacement process, it is determined which of the fluctuations of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is to be replaced according to the fluctuation display status of the sub-variation of the normal map being executed, and the final stop symbol of the determined symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is replaced. Perform processing. In addition, when the sub-variation of the normal map being executed is replaced with the sub-variation of the special map, the variation display time is adjusted so that the sub-variation after the replacement ends at the end timing of the main variation of the special map. ..

As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured to stop the symbols in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and each symbol row The display mode when is stopped is a mode in which the fluctuation display is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display is switched from the high-speed fluctuation to the low-speed fluctuation. In this case, the player cannot or is difficult to visually recognize the changing symbol during the high-speed fluctuation, and the player can visually recognize the changing symbol during the low-speed fluctuation. Therefore, when the symbols are replaced, if the symbols in the symbol row during low-speed fluctuation or the symbol row in the stop display are replaced, the player will clearly recognize that the replacement has been performed.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the symbol has been replaced, the symbol of the symbol string during high-speed fluctuation is prioritized over the symbol sequence during low-speed fluctuation and the symbol sequence during stop display. It is configured to be replaced. As a result, the player recognizes that the symbol has been replaced, and it is possible to reduce the feeling of emptiness of the effect that has been performed up to that point.

However, depending on the fluctuation status of each symbol row Z1 to Z3, it may be necessary to replace the symbol row during low-speed fluctuation or the symbol row with stop display. Specifically, in this effect replacement process, the effect pattern is replaced with an effect pattern corresponding to the jackpot result (or rarely a missed result) as the effect pattern based on the request of the special figure special electric control. As a premise of the effect pattern of, it is desirable that the reach display is performed. That is, for example, if the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 have already displayed the stop display and the reach line is not formed by the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3, the final stop symbol of the changing middle symbol row Z2 is displayed. No matter how they are replaced, it is not possible to form a predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, first, it is grasped whether or not the reach display is performed in the sub-variation of the normal map being executed, and if the reach display is not performed, the reach display is performed and the reach display is performed. If so, the final stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced.

Specifically, in the effect replacement process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 26, a process of grasping whether or not the sub-variation of the normal map being executed corresponds to the reach display is executed by steps S1501 to S1503. ..

That is, first, in step S1501, the remaining fluctuation display time of the normal map sub-variation is grasped. The sound / light control device 300 inputs the information of the fluctuation display time included in the fluctuation command to the progress counter provided in the RAM 304 based on the reception of the fluctuation command and the type command at the time of the fluctuation of the normal map. The progress counter is decremented by 1 every predetermined cycle and updated, and becomes 0 at the timing when the set fluctuation display time elapses. In step S1501, by confirming the numerical information of this progress counter, the remaining fluctuation display time of the normal map sub-variation can be grasped.

In the following step S1502, the fluctuation display time of the special figure sub-variation is grasped. Specifically, the special figure change display time is grasped based on the change command at the time of the special figure change received this time.

Then, in step S1503, the remaining fluctuation display time of the currently executing normal map sub-variation grasped in step S1501 is compared with the fluctuation display time of the current special map sub-variation grasped in step S1502. It is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation display time of the normal map sub-variation is longer than the fluctuation display time of the special map sub-variation.

Here, with respect to the fluctuation display time of the game times on the normal map side (sub-variation of the normal map and the main fluctuation of the normal map) and the fluctuation display time of the game times on the special map side (sub-variation of the special map and the main variation of the special map), FIG. In the low frequency support mode, the fluctuation display time on the normal map side selected in the fluctuation display time table for normal map (FIG. 10 (c)) for non-reach occurrence is any. It is shorter than the variation display time on the special map side selected in the variation display time table for special maps (FIG. 10A). In other words, when the remaining fluctuation display time of the normal map sub-variation is longer than the fluctuation display time of the special map sub-variation, it means that the game times on the normal map side are the game times in which the reach display occurs. When the remaining fluctuation display time of the normal map sub-variation is shorter than the fluctuation display time of the special map sub-variation, it means that the game times on the normal map side are game times in which reach display does not occur.

When it is determined in step S1503 that the fluctuation display time of the special map sub-variation is longer than the remaining fluctuation display time of the normal map sub-variation being executed, that is, the reach display does not occur in the game times on the normal map side being executed. In the case of a game round, step S1504 executes the process of extending the fluctuation display time of the normal map sub-variation. Such a process is a process of extending the variation display time of the game times being executed so that the game times end at the end timing of the special figure main variation. Specifically, in step S1503, the time (period) obtained by subtracting the remaining fluctuation display time of the normal map sub-variation from the fluctuation display time of the special map sub-variation (special map main fluctuation) with respect to the numerical information of the current progress counter. ), The process of adding the numerical information corresponding to) is executed.

For example, if the numerical information of the current progress counter corresponds to 2 sec, the 2 sec is the remaining fluctuation display time of the normal map sub-variation. Since the variation display time of the special map main variation (special map sub variation) in the low frequency support mode is 20 sec (see FIG. 10A), in this case, the variation display time of the game times being executed is this difference. A certain 18 sec will be extended. In this case, the relationship between the normal map sub-variation and the special map sub-variation is that the variation from the start to the timing when the effect replacement process is performed in the game round is the normal map sub-variation, and this extended 18 sec. The fluctuation is a special figure sub-variation.

After the process of step S1504 is performed, and after the timing-based symbol replacement process is executed in step S1505, the effect replacement process is terminated.

In the timing-based symbol replacement process, the symbol sequence to be replaced is determined according to the fluctuation status of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 being executed by the symbol display device 42. In this case, by grasping the information of the progress counter for the sub-variation of the normal map and the effect pattern determined in the effect pattern determination process (step S1404) at the time of the change of the normal map in the effect determination process (FIG. 25), each It is possible to grasp the fluctuation status of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In addition, when replacing a symbol, the symbol after replacement is determined based on the type command received this time, depending on whether it is a jackpot result or not.

As described above, the case of making a negative judgment in step S1503 is a game time in which the game time on the normal map side being executed does not correspond to the reach display. Performs a process for preferentially replacing the last stop symbol in the column so that the reach display is performed. In addition, if it is not possible to make the reach display perform in such a process, a process is performed to make the reach display perform by changing the symbol string during low-speed fluctuation or the symbol string during stop display again at high speed. conduct.

In the process of replacing the final stopped symbol during the high-speed fluctuation again, the effect pattern table of FIG. 26 is referred to for determining the effect pattern after the symbol replacement. Specifically, it is specified which of the addresses As (1) to As (x) the effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determination process at the time of the fluctuation of the normal map corresponds to, and the change received this time. The final stop symbol is replaced by determining the effect pattern of the special figure sub-variation corresponding to the command and type command and the specified address. At the time of this replacement, the address As (n) in the effect table for changing the normal map and the addresses Ap (m) to Ap (m + z) in the effect table for changing the special figure are associated with each other. Of the addresses Ap (m) to Ap (m + z), the addresses Ap (r) to Ap (r + s) are set as the addresses of the effect patterns continuous from the effect pattern Ds (n) corresponding to As (n). Then, in the process of replacing the final stop symbol during high-speed fluctuation again, when the effect pattern of the sub-variation of the normal map being executed is the address As (n), the variation command and the type command received this time are referred to. The address 1 from the addresses Ap (r) to Ap (r + s) in the effect table for the special figure change is determined, and the special figure sub-change is executed in the effect pattern after the final stop symbol is replaced. By doing so, it becomes possible to associate the effect pattern before replacement with the effect pattern after replacement as a continuous effect.

It should be noted that, as described above, a configuration in which a plurality of addresses on the special map side are associated with one of the addresses on the normal map side may be used instead of a configuration in which the addresses on the special map side are associated with each other on a one-to-one basis.

By the way, in the timing-based symbol replacement process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 27, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the lower symbol sequence Z3 is undergoing high-speed fluctuation. When the lower symbol row Z3 is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, the final stop symbol replacement process in the lower symbol row Z3 and the middle symbol row Z2 is executed in step S1602, and then this process is terminated. In step S1602, the final stop symbol in the lower symbol row Z3 during high-speed fluctuation is replaced so as to form a reach line with the upper symbol row Z1. Further, the game result is grasped from the type command at the time of the special figure change received this time, and the final stop symbol of the middle symbol string Z2 during the high-speed change is finally determined to be the game result at the time of the special figure change. More specifically, in the case of a jackpot result, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is determined as the final stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2, and in the case of the off result, a symbol different from the symbol forming the reach line is determined. It is determined as the final stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2. In this case, as described above, the effect pattern after the final stop symbol is replaced is determined with reference to the addresses As (1) to As (x) in the effect table of the sub-variation of the normal map. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 63 is executed according to the effect pattern, and the output control of the speaker unit 65 is executed.

Further, in step S1602, an effect replacement command is output to the display control device 400. The effect replacement command includes information that the effect is replaced, information on the final stop symbol after the replacement, and the effect pattern after the replacement, and the display control device 400 is based on the received effect replacement command. Then, a data table for performing the effect after replacement is read from the program ROM 403, and a drawing list is output to the VDP 405 at each predetermined image update timing according to the data table.

When the lower symbol row Z3 is not undergoing high-speed fluctuation in step S1601, it means that the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 have already stopped and the reach line is not formed. In this case, in the subsequent step S1603, it is determined whether or not the middle symbol sequence Z2 is undergoing high-speed fluctuation. When the middle symbol row Z2 is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, the re-variation processing of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 is executed in the following step S1604. In such a process, the final stop symbols of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are determined so that the reach line is formed after the re-variation, and the effect pattern after the re-variation is determined.

The effect pattern table of FIG. 26 is also referred to for determining the effect pattern after the re-variation. Specifically, it is specified which of the addresses As (1) to As (x) the effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determination process at the time of the fluctuation of the normal map corresponds to, and the change received this time. The effect pattern of the special figure sub-variation corresponding to the command and type command and the specified address is determined, and the final stop symbol is replaced. As described above, the address As (n) in the effect table for changing the normal map and the addresses Ap (m) to Ap (m + z) in the effect table for changing the special figure are associated with each other. Of the addresses Ap (m) to Ap (m + z), the addresses Ap (t) to Ap (t + u) are set as addresses of the effect patterns that are not continuous from the effect pattern Ds (n) corresponding to As (n). In step S1604, when the effect pattern of the sub-variation of the normal map being executed is the address As (n), the address 1 from the addresses Ap (t) to Ap (t + u) in the effect table for the change of the special figure. Is determined, and the special figure sub-variation is executed in the effect pattern after replacing the final stop symbol. By doing so, it is possible to associate the effect pattern before the replacement with the effect pattern after the replacement as a discontinuous effect (different effect before and after the replacement). And, by replacing with a different production pattern from the past, the player can expect that a special production will be performed, that is, a big hit result, and it is possible to raise the degree of attention. Will be.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the effect pattern may be replaced with an effect pattern having continuity with the effect pattern so far (step S1602), or may be replaced with an effect pattern different from the effect pattern so far. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the interest.

Further, in step S1604, a re-variation command is output to the display control device 400 in order to re-change the upper and lower symbol sequences Z1 and Z3 during low-speed fluctuation or stop at high speed, and a sound effect when executing the re-variation and the like are output. Is executed by controlling the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 65. Upon receiving the revariation command, the display control device 400 reads a data table for revariating the symbol sequence from the program ROM 403, and draws the data table on the VDP 405 at each predetermined image update timing according to the data table. Output the list.

In the following step S1605, the last stop symbol replacement process in the middle symbol row Z2 is executed. In such processing, the game result is grasped from the type command at the time of the special figure change received this time, and the final stop symbol of the middle symbol string Z2 during the high-speed change is finally determined to be the game result at the time of the special figure change. do. More specifically, if it is a jackpot result, the final stop symbol of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 determined in step S1604, that is, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is the final stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2. If the result is out of alignment, a symbol different from the symbol forming the reach line is determined as the final stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 63 is executed according to the effect pattern for generating reach, and the output control of the speaker unit 65 is executed. Further, in step S1605, an effect replacement command is output to the display control device 400. The processing of the display control device 400 that has received the effect replacement command has already been described. However, the effect pattern in this case is an effect pattern different from the conventional effect patterns determined by the revariation process (step S1604). After executing the process of step S1605, this process ends.

If the middle symbol sequence Z2 is not undergoing high-speed fluctuation but is undergoing low-speed fluctuation or is stopped in step S1603, the process for re-variation processing of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is executed in step S1606. Such a process is substantially the same as the process of step S1604. That is, the final stop symbols of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are determined so that the reach line is formed after the re-variation, and the effect pattern after the re-variation is received this time. Determined based on the command. Then, in order to change the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 during low-speed fluctuation or stopped at high speed again, a re-variation command is output to the display control device 400, and an effect such as a sound effect when executing the re-variation is displayed and emitted. This is executed by controlling the unit 63 and the speaker unit 65. The processing of the display control device 400 that has received the revariation command has already been described.

In the following step S1607, the last stop symbol replacement process in the middle symbol row Z2 is executed. Such a process is the same process as the process of step S1605. After executing the process of step S1607, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the effect replacement process (FIG. 26), if it is determined that the fluctuation display time of the normal map sub-variation being executed in step S1503 is longer than the fluctuation display time of the special map sub-variation, the process is performed in step S1506. The process of shortening the fluctuation display time of the sub-variation of the normal map is executed. Such a process is a process of shortening the variation display time of the game times being executed so that the game times end at the end timing of the special figure main variation. Specifically, in step S1506, the numerical information corresponding to the time (period) obtained by subtracting the fluctuation display time of the special map sub-variation from the remaining fluctuation display time of the normal map sub-variation is subtracted from the numerical information of the current progress counter. Execute the process to be performed.

For example, if the numerical information of the current progress counter corresponds to 36 sec, the 36 sec is the remaining fluctuation display time of the normal map sub-variation. As described above, since the fluctuation display time of the special map main fluctuation (normal map sub-variation) in the low frequency support mode is 20 sec, in this case, the fluctuation display time of the game times being executed is shortened by 16 sec, which is the difference. It will be. In this case, the relationship between the normal map sub-variation and the special map sub-variation is that the variation from the start to the timing when the effect replacement process is performed in the game round is the normal map sub-variation, and the variation after that is special. Figure Sub-variation.

Further, as described above, the case where the affirmative determination is made in step S1503 means that the game times on the normal drawing side are game times in which the reach display occurs. In this case, since the reach display occurs in the sub-variation of the normal symbol during execution, it is not necessary to replace the final stop symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 to form a reach line. Therefore, after the process of step S1506 is executed, the final stop symbol replacement process in the middle symbol string Z2 is executed in step S1507, and then the effect replacement process is terminated. The process of step S1507 is the same as the process of step S1605 and step S1607. However, in this case, the effect pattern after the replacement of the final stop symbol is determined based on the effect pattern of the sub-variation of the normal map being executed as in step S1607. Therefore, the effect pattern of the reach display being executed is replaced with the continuous effect pattern, and the reach display so far is not wasted. After executing the process of step S1507, the effect replacement process is terminated.

As described above, in the effect replacement process in the present embodiment, depending on whether or not the reach display can be executed, the effect pattern may be replaced with a continuous effect pattern, or an effect pattern different from the effect pattern being executed, that is, a discontinuous effect pattern. Replace the production so that it becomes. However, the mode of effect replacement is not limited to this, and for example, in the case of a continuous effect pattern, the lower symbol row during low-speed fluctuation may be slipped or suddenly stopped to display the reach, or it has already stopped. The reach display may be performed by replacing the symbol while hiding the symbol in the smoke, for example, without high-speed fluctuation. In short, when using a continuous production pattern, the production before and after the replacement is in a continuous relationship (the production continues with the same character in the same state, the production with the same story tailoring continues, or one before and after the replacement. It would be good if there was something that would be a production). Further, when the effect pattern is discontinuous, it may be developed into a super reach of animation or moving image accompanied by the movement of a movable accessory, or the screen may be blacked out to provide a so-called freeze effect. In short, if the production pattern is discontinuous, the production before and after the replacement may be discontinuous (characters appearing in the production may be changed, the format may be changed, or different story-style production may be performed). Just do it.

Returning to the description of the effect determination process (FIG. 25), if the high frequency support mode is in progress instead of the low frequency support mode in step S1409, the process proceeds to step S1416. In step S1416, it is determined whether or not the main variation of the normal map is being executed. As already explained, the sub-variation of the normal figure is not performed during the high frequency support mode, and the jackpot notification is performed only when the mode shifts to the support execution mode. However, the MPU 302 of the sound / light control device 300 can grasp the period during which the main fluctuation of the normal figure is being executed. That is, when the numerical information of the above-mentioned progress counter in which the information of the fluctuation display time is input based on the reception of the fluctuation command and the type command at the time of the fluctuation of the normal map is not 0, the main fluctuation of the normal map is executed. Grasp it as a period of time.

When the normal figure main change is being executed, it is determined in step S1417 whether or not the normal figure main change corresponds to the support winning. If it does not correspond to the support winning, or if the normal figure main change is not being executed in step S1416, it is determined in step S1418 whether or not this special figure change corresponds to the jackpot result. do. Specifically, the game result is grasped from the change command and the type command at the time of the special figure change received this time, and it is determined whether or not it is a big hit result. If it is a jackpot result, the jackpot notification process is executed in step S1419.

After executing any of the processes of step S1413, step S1415 and step S1419, after making an affirmative determination in step S1414 or step S1417, or after making a negative determination in step S1418, another process is executed in step S1420. After that, the main production determination process is terminated.

In the other processes of step S1420, the process for executing the ceiling notice effect based on the reception of the ceiling notice command, and the support winning time based on the reception of the opening command and the ending command for the normal drawing and the special drawing. Executes the process for advancing the effect of the effect and the effect for the open / close execution mode.

In addition, even in the high-frequency support mode, if the main fluctuation of the normal map during execution corresponds to the support winning (step S1417: YES), the process for replacing it with the one based on the request of the special figure special electric control. (Step S1418 and step S1419) are not performed.

Next, refer to FIG. 29 regarding the relationship between the winning of the through gates 35A and 35B (general drawing winning), the winning of the operating opening 34 and the special winning opening 52 (special drawing winning), and the variable display based on these winnings. I will explain.

First, when the normal map winning occurs at the timing of t1, the normal map main fluctuation in the normal map display unit 39 and the normal map sub-variation in the symbol display device 42 are started. As described above, these fluctuation display times are determined in step S510 of the normal map fluctuation start process (FIG. 16), and at the timing of t2, which is the elapsed timing of the variable display time, the normal map main fluctuation and the normal map The sub-variation ends. In this case, the production of the Fuzu main fluctuation and the Fuzu sub-variation corresponds to the game result based on the Fuzu prize. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 34a is started.

When a special figure prize is generated at the timing of t4, which is changing between the normal figure main fluctuation and the normal map sub change started at the timing of t3, the special figure main change (special figure sub) based on the special figure prize. When the fluctuation display time (TA1) of the fluctuation) is longer than the remaining fluctuation display time (TA2) of the normal map sub-variation, the extension processing of the fluctuation display time of the normal map sub-variation currently being executed is performed. As a result, even if the normal map main fluctuation ends at the timing of t5, the normal map sub-variation does not end. Then, the sub-variation of the normal map ends at the timing of t6 when the main variation of the special map ends. In this case, as already explained, basically, the production of the sub-variation of the normal map ends in a state of being replaced with the one corresponding to the game result based on the special map prize. Then, for example, when the game result based on the special figure winning is a big hit result, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode and the opening / closing control of the special electric winning device 32 is started.

When a special figure prize is generated at the timing of t8, which is a change of the normal figure main fluctuation and the normal figure sub change started at the timing of t7, the special figure main change (special figure sub) based on the special figure prize. When the fluctuation display time (TA3) of (variation) is shorter than the remaining fluctuation display time (TA4) of the normal map sub-variation, the variation display time of the normal map sub-variation currently being executed is shortened. As a result, when the special map main variation ends at the timing of t9, the normal map main variation does not end, but the normal map sub variation ends. In this case, as already explained, basically, the production of the sub-variation of the normal map ends in a state of being replaced with the one corresponding to the game result based on the special map prize. Then, for example, when the game result based on the special figure winning is a big hit result, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode and the opening / closing control of the special electric winning device 32 is started. On the other hand, the normal map sub-variation ends at the timing of t10, which is the elapsed timing of the variation display time determined at the start of the variation of t7.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special winning opening 52, a lottery for shifting to the open / close execution mode (win / fail determination process on the special figure side) is performed, and the effect for the game round corresponding to the win / fail lottery is displayed as a symbol. In the configuration performed by the device 42, a part of the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35A is configured to win a prize in the special winning opening 52, and even based on the winning in the through gate 35A, the symbol display device 42 It was configured to produce a game for the game. As a result, even during the period when the special winning opening 52 is not won (the general winning opening 53 is won), it is as if the player is drawn to the open / close execution mode. Can be shown to. However, in such a configuration, if a prize is generated in the special winning opening 52 during the production for the game round based on the winning in the through gate 35A, the sound / light control device 300 is used. Requests for symbol variation for producing a game-playing effect will be duplicated. Therefore, in such a case, the staging replacement process (FIG. 26) is configured to replace the staging of the game times with one corresponding to the winning of the special winning opening 52, thereby eliminating the inconvenience of the above-mentioned duplication and playing the game. It is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention of.

In particular, in the configuration in which the lottery result display unit 37 performs the special figure main variation and the normal map main variation, and the symbol display device 42 performs the effect for the game round (special map sub-variation and general map sub-variation). The transition to the open / close execution mode and the transition to the support execution mode are performed according to the end timing of the variation display by the lottery result display unit 37. Therefore, when the above-mentioned effect is replaced, if the end timing of the effect for the game round on the symbol display device 42 side and the transition timing to the open / close execution mode or the support execution mode do not match, the following Inconvenience can occur. That is, for example, if the stop timing of the lottery result display unit 37 is too early for the end timing of the effect on the symbol display device 42 side, it opens and closes for the player who is watching not only the lottery result display unit 37 but also the symbol display device 42. It may cause irritation that the transition to the execution mode or the support execution mode is not displayed. On the contrary, if the end timing of the effect on the symbol display device 42 side is too early for the stop timing of the lottery result display unit 37, the opening / closing execution mode or the support execution mode is entered before the lottery result display unit 37 is stopped. There is a risk that the transition will be known and the interest in seeing the effect on the design display device 42 side will be diminished.

Further, in such a configuration, the managers of the game hall generally confirm the winning / failing lottery by checking the lottery result display unit 37 side and confirming the result, and then the winning / failing lottery is performed. It is considered to confirm whether or not any fraudulent activity such as shifting to the open / close execution mode or the support execution mode has been performed without being based on it. Therefore, by matching the transition timing to the open / close execution mode or the support execution mode with the stop timing of the variation display on the lottery result display unit 37, it is possible to easily detect the above-mentioned fraudulent activity.

As a specific configuration described above, the game ball that has won the through gate 35A is sure to enter the special accessory 33, and the special accessory 33 can be awarded to the special winning opening 52 by the distribution plate 54. The structure is such that one passage 51a and a second passage 51b, which cannot win a prize in the special winning opening 52, are distributed.

Then, the variable display time of the game times based on the above-mentioned winning of the through gate 35A is set from passing through the through gate 35A to passing through the first passage 51a of the special accessory 33 and winning the special winning opening 52. It was set longer than expected. As a result, when the effect for the game round (special figure sub-variation) based on the winning of the special winning opening 52 is replaced with the effect for the game round (normal figure sub-variation) based on the winning of the through gate 35A, the relevant It is possible to reduce the possibility that the production for the game round based on the winning of the through gate 35A has been completed.

That is, with the above configuration, the game ball passes through the through gate 35A, and then the game ball wins the special winning opening 52, but the game times based on the winning of the through gate 35A. If the variable display time is shorter than the period required for the above passage, the effect for the game round is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35A, and the game ball further wins the special winning opening 52. Based on this, another production for the game will be started. Therefore, when one game ball flows down, a plurality of game times are performed, which may give a sense of discomfort as a player. On the other hand, when the special winning opening 52 is won by making the variable display time of the game times based on the winning of the through gate 35A longer than the period required for passing as described above, the through gate 35A is used. It is possible to configure the game so that the game is played based on the winning prize, and it is possible to reduce the possibility of giving the above-mentioned discomfort.

However, if a prize is further generated for the through gate 35A while the effect for the game round is being executed based on the prize for the through gate 35A, and the prize corresponds to the ceiling, the above-mentioned running game is performed. There is a possibility that the special winning opening 52 will be won after the end of the round. Therefore, in this case, the effect for playing the game is started based on the winning of the special winning opening 52 (step S1410 to step S1413). As a result, it is possible to avoid an event in which the game round corresponding to the ceiling is not performed.

In such a configuration, when the effect for the game round is replaced, the game is being executed (for winning the through gate 35A) according to the length of the variable display time of the game round based on the winning of the special winning opening 52. (Based on) The configuration is such that the variable display time of the game times is extended or shortened. As a result, the timing of shifting to the open / close execution mode after the variation display time of the game times based on the winning of the special winning opening 52 has elapsed and the end timing of the effect for the game times on the symbol display device 42 side are matched. Is possible.

The transition to the support execution mode is performed based on the winning of the through gate 35A (the winning / failing judgment process on the normal drawing side), and the production for the game round based on the winning of the through gate 35A is performed to the support execution mode. The content corresponds to the transition lottery. As a result, even if the production is for a game round based on winning a prize in the through gate 35A without a lottery for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, the degree of attention can be increased.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the operating port 34 is allowed to win a prize by shifting to the support execution mode, and based on the winning of the working port 34, the opening / closing execution mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode with a probability of almost 100%. Therefore, the transition lottery based on the winning of the through gate 35A can be substantially regarded as the transition lottery to the opening / closing execution mode, and the effect for the game round accompanying the winning of either the through gate 35A or the special winning opening 52 can be achieved. Regardless, it is possible to draw attention to the player without any difference.

When the lottery result of the transition lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 is the support winning result, the lottery result of the transition lottery performed based on the winning of the special winning opening 52 is the jackpot result. Similarly, the symbol display device 42 forms a combination of the same symbols and is configured to stop and display. With such a configuration, if the lottery for transition to the support execution mode is won and the lottery for transition to the open / close execution mode is not won, or if the lottery for transition to the support execution mode is won. However, both the case where the lottery for transition to the open / close execution mode is won and the case where the lottery for transition to any of the transition lottery is won are displayed as the same stop result, so that they are the same in the game times. It solves the inconvenience that no state shifts even though the combination of symbols is formed and the stop display is displayed, and in each of the above cases, the game becomes complicated due to the replacement of the stop display. Never.

As described above, the result of the transition lottery based on the winning of the through gate 35A is a general drawing, even though the structure is such that the symbol display device 42 side produces the effect for the game round based on the winning of the through gate 35A and the special winning opening 52. It is displayed on the display unit 39, and the result of the transition lottery based on the winning of the special winning opening 52 is displayed on the special drawing display unit 38. Therefore, while achieving each of the above effects, the manager of the game hall, etc., by checking each of the display units 38, 39, grasps that each transition lottery has been performed and the lottery result. Can be done.

In the effect replacement process (FIG. 27), the final stop symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are replaced, and then the reach display is performed. That is, the effect is replaced so that the effect pattern is continuous from the effect pattern being executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the effect of the sub-variation of the normal map, which has been performed up to that point, from being wasted, and to make the player feel that the effect up to that point is useless. Further, by doing so, it is possible to reduce the feeling of strangeness when the replacement is performed.

Further, in the timing-based symbol replacement process (FIG. 28) in the effect replacement process, the fluctuation status of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is grasped, and if any of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is changing, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are changed. The final stop symbol of No. 1 was replaced, and if any of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 was stopped, the symbol row was changed again. As a result, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the reach line is not formed at the time of replacement and the reach display cannot be performed.

In the special accessory 33 provided in the game area PE, in the game ball passing area R from the ball passing port 33a to the special winning opening 52, the game ball that has passed through the ball passing port 33a is placed in the first passage 51a (special winning opening). Since there are eight distribution plates 54 (upper and lower 8 steps) to be distributed to either the second passage 51b (the passage that cannot win the special winning opening 52) or the second passage 51b (the passage that can win the prize in 52). Not all the game balls pass through the ball passage port 33a, but all of them win the special prize opening 52, and only when the game balls are distributed to the first passage 51a side by each distribution plate 54. A prize is given to the mouth 52. In particular, each distribution plate 54 changes the distribution destination of the game ball based on the arrival of the game ball that has passed through the ball passage port 33a, and a predetermined number of game balls pass through the ball passage port 33a. As a result, the special winning opening 52 is in a state of winning a game ball. That is, in order to make a game ball win a prize in the special winning opening 52 and obtain a predetermined privilege, it is one condition that a predetermined number of game balls are passed through the ball passing opening 33a. In this case, it is considered that the player who plays the pachinko machine 10 positively continues the game with the expectation that some privilege will be obtained by passing a predetermined number of game balls at the ball passing port 33a. This makes it possible to encourage the player to continue playing.

The special accessory 33 has an eight-stage distribution plate 54 from the upstream side to the downstream side in the game ball passage region R, and the eight-stage distribution plate 54 is played by the distribution plate 54 in the previous stage. When the balls are distributed to the first passage 51a side, the game balls are arranged so as to reach the distribution plate 54 in the subsequent stage. Then, when the number of passing game balls in the ball passing port 33a reaches a predetermined number (256 in this embodiment), the distribution destinations of the game balls for the eight distribution plates 54 are all on the first passage 51a side, and the game is played. The ball is in a state of winning a prize in the special winning opening 52. In this case, the distribution plate 54 of each stage alternately changes the distribution destination between the first passage 51a side and the second passage 51b side each time the game ball arrives. Therefore, in order to change the number of game balls required for all the distribution destinations of each distribution plate 54 to be on the first passage 51a side (that is, the number of balls required to win a prize in the special winning opening 52), the distribution plate 54 By changing the number of installation stages, it is possible to easily carry out a design change regarding winning a prize in the special winning opening 52. For example, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to make it difficult to acquire the privilege (reduce the chance of winning the special winning opening 52), the number of stages of installing the distribution plate 54 is increased to make it easier to acquire the privilege (to the special winning opening 52). In order to increase the chances of winning a prize), it is advisable to reduce the number of stages in which the distribution plate 54 is installed.

Each distribution plate 54 is a swinging body swingably supported in the game ball passing region R, and swings when the game ball hits the game ball to switch the distribution destination of the game ball. Is. In this case, since the distribution destination by the distribution plate 54 is not determined by electrical processing, arithmetic processing for switching the distribution destination is unnecessary, and power consumption does not occur at the time of distribution. Further, since it is not affected by the electric signal, there is no inconvenience that the distribution destination is operated by an illegal electric signal.

The special prize 33 is a special prize opening 52 in which a lottery process for granting a privilege is executed when the game ball (the game ball entered in the special bonus 33) that has passed through the ball passage port 33a is won. It is distributed to any of the general winning openings 53 where the lottery process is not executed. According to this configuration, when the game ball passes through the ball passing port 33a, a prize is generated in any of the winning ports 52 and 53, and the payout of the game ball can be expected along with the winning. That is, for the player, some benefit is brought about by the game ball passing through the ball passing port 33a. For that reason, the player is encouraged to launch and operate the launching device aiming at the passage of the game ball at the ball passage port 33a, and as a result, the number of balls passing through the ball passage port 33a increases and a special prize is awarded. The chances of winning a prize in the mouth 52 will increase.

Since the winning probability of the lottery process performed when a game ball wins in the special winning opening 52 is 100%, the player has a high probability that a predetermined number of game balls pass through the ball passing opening 33a. You can get benefits at. Therefore, it is also possible to encourage the player to continue playing.

The winning probability of the lottery process may be 50% or more, and may be changed to a probability other than 100% such as 50% and 80%.

The gaming area PE is provided with an operating port 34 as a winning unit for executing a lottery process (lottery process related to an opening / closing execution mode) similar to that at the time of winning a prize in the special winning opening 52. In this case, even before a predetermined number of game balls pass through the ball passage port 33a, that is, even before the game ball wins in the special winning opening 52, the game ball wins in the operating port 34. Since the lottery process is carried out by the player, another winning opportunity can be given to the player who is playing the game. For example, immediately after the number of balls passed through the ball passing port 33a reaches a predetermined number and the lottery process is performed, there is a time lag before the next lottery process, and the player's willingness to continue playing is reduced. However, if the lottery process is carried out by winning a prize in the operating port 34 as described above, it is possible to keep the expectation of winning at any time and encourage the player to continue the game. It becomes possible.

In the game area PE, a through gate 35A is provided at a position directly above the ball passage port 33a, which is the entrance of the special accessory 33, and the game ball passes through the ball passage port 33a immediately after passing through the through gate 35A. Based on the fact that the game ball passes through the ball passage opening 33a and wins the special winning opening 52, a lottery is made as to whether or not to give the player the first privilege (game privilege in the opening / closing execution mode). Based on the fact that the game ball passes through the through gate 35A, a lottery is made to determine whether or not to give the player a second privilege (game privilege in the support execution mode). In this case, when the player launches the game ball aiming at the ball passage port 33a, it also aims at the through gate 35A at the same time. In this case, if the game ball passes through the through gate 35A, the lottery process for the second privilege is performed. Further, when the game ball passes through the ball passing port 33a following the through gate 35A and the number of times the ball passes through the ball passing port 33a reaches a predetermined number, the game ball wins the special winning opening 52, and the first 2 A lottery process for benefits is performed. Here, the player has more chances to obtain not only the second privilege but also the first privilege by passing the game ball at each of the above-mentioned passage portions (through gate 35A, ball passage port 33a), and is motivated to continue the game. Will increase.

The first effect (special figure sub-variation) determined based on the lottery result of the first privilege (game privilege in the opening / closing execution mode) at the time of winning the ball passage opening 33a or the special winning opening 52, and when passing through the through gate 35A. The symbol display device 42 is configured to perform both the second effect (sub-variation of the normal map) determined based on the lottery result of the second privilege (game privilege in the support execution mode). In this case, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the effect is for the first privilege or the second privilege while the effect is being executed by the symbol display device 42. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the effect of the symbol display device 42.

The first production and the second production include the same production form. That is, in the symbol display device 42, the display effect of the same background, the same character pattern, and the same character pattern is performed. For example, when the variable symbol is changed in the symbol display device 42, the same variable symbol is changed in both the first effect and the second effect, and only the final finalized symbol is used for the first effect. It is preferable to use a design or a design for the second production. This makes it more difficult to determine which of the first and second effects is being performed, and it is possible to increase interest in the results of the effects.

In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35A, the game ball is immediately entered into the special accessory 33, and the inside of the special accessory 33 is not visible. It has become. Therefore, it is not possible to determine whether the production this time is based on winning the special winning opening 52 or by passing the ball through the through gate 35A, and it is possible to further increase the attention of the player regarding the granting of benefits.

The expected number of prize balls is set higher for the first privilege (game privilege in the open / close execution mode) than for the second privilege (game privilege in the support execution mode). In this case, the player plays the game in anticipation of the generation of the first privilege having a large expected number of prize balls, but cannot recognize which of the first privilege and the second privilege is currently being executed. Therefore, by expecting the player to generate the first privilege, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the lottery result.

In the normal figure normal electric control process, it is determined that the special figure special electric counter is "0", that is, the game times based on the special figure special electric control process are not executed by the symbol display device 42. In other words, the execution status of the special figure special electric control is monitored in the normal figure and special electric control process. When the symbol change occurs in the symbol display device 42 as the special symbol special electric control process, the symbol change is not started in the symbol display device 42 as the normal symbol normal electric control process. As a result, in the configuration in which the symbol variation based on the normal map and special electric control process and the symbol change based on the special figure special electric control process are performed by the same symbol display device 42, the symbol change due to the special figure special electric control is halfway. It is possible to suppress the interruption due to the above, and it is possible to display the design without any discomfort. Therefore, even if the lottery for the first privilege and the lottery for the second privilege occur randomly, the symbol display device 42 can perform an appropriate display effect.

In the special accessory 33, a cover member 60 is provided to cover each distribution plate 54 from the front of the gaming machine, and the cover member 60 makes each distribution plate 54 invisible to the player. In this case, whether the distribution destination of each distribution plate 54 is the first passage 51a (passage that can win the special winning opening 52) or the second passage 51b (passage that cannot win the special winning opening 52). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not it is. Further, although it is impossible for the player to visually recognize each distribution plate 54, it is possible to recognize the existence of each distribution plate 54 by the cover member 60 provided in the game area PE, and the game ball can be recognized. It is possible to raise the player's attention to the distribution.

In the process in which the number of balls passing through the ball passing port 33a approaches a predetermined number (= 256), when the number of passing balls reaches a predetermined intermediate number (= 251) smaller than the predetermined number, the mediant number is reached. It is configured to execute a notification process for notifying the player of the arrival of. In this case, the player can easily grasp how soon the game ball will win the special winning opening 52, and can increase the degree of expectation for the winning. This also makes it possible to encourage the continuation of the game.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the sub-variation in the normal drawing is replaced when the ceiling is reached is different from the first embodiment. Specifically, when the ceiling is reached, the 1st Fuzu winning counter is used to replace the Fuzu sub-variation with a production corresponding to the ceiling in advance at the start of the Fuzu sub-variation. The configuration is such that the fluctuation display time of the special map main fluctuation at the ceiling is determined so as to correspond to the fluctuation display time of the sub-variation of the normal map. The detailed processing configuration will be described below.

<Acquisition process of pending information on the general map side>
First, the process of acquiring the reserved information on the normal drawing side in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The process of FIG. 30 is a process executed in place of the process of FIG.

In the present embodiment, similarly to steps S401 to S409 of the first embodiment, in steps S1701 to S1709, counters C4, C5, CS2 for general drawing based on winning the through gates 35A and 35B. The storage process and the ceiling notice process are executed. Further, in step S1710, as in step S410, by determining whether or not the first general figure winning counter is "256", it is determined whether or not the number of times the ball has entered the special accessory 33 has reached the ceiling. judge. If it has not reached the ceiling, the acquisition process is terminated as it is.

When the ceiling is reached, in the following step S1711, it is determined whether or not the normal map normal electric counter is "0", and it is determined whether or not the normal change is being displayed. When the normal figure normal electric counter is not "0" (when the normal figure main fluctuation is displaying the change), the process of setting "1" to the ceiling replacement flag provided in the RAM 84 in the following step S1712 is performed. Run. The ceiling replacement flag is a flag for the MPU 82 to specify that the currently executing normal map sub-variation is replaced with the effect corresponding to the ceiling.

In the following step S1713, the ceiling replacement command is set as an output target to the sound / light control device 300. The processing of the sound light control device 300 based on the reception of the ceiling replacement command will be described in detail later.

If a negative determination is made in step S1711, or after the process of step S1713 is executed, the process of setting "1" to the ceiling flag provided in the RAM 84 is executed in step S1714. The ceiling flag is a flag for the MPU 82 to specify that the number of times the game ball has entered the special accessory 33 has reached 256 times, which is the ceiling. Then, the ceiling flag is cleared when it is determined in step S701 that the final stop time has elapsed in the process during confirmation of the normal drawing (FIG. 18).

In the following step S1715, the acquisition process ends after clearing the first general figure winning counter in the same manner as in step S411.

<Public map fluctuation start processing>
Next, the normal map fluctuation start processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31 (a). The process of FIG. 31 (a) is a process executed in place of the process of FIG.

In the present embodiment, similarly to the processes of steps S501 to S509 in the first embodiment, the support mode transition process and the pass / fail determination process corresponding to the support mode are executed in steps S1801 to S1809.

In step S1810, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the ceiling flag. If it is not set, the normal fluctuation display time and the stop result grasping process are executed in step S1811. The process of step S1811 is the same as the process of step S510.

If the ceiling flag is set to "1" in step S1810, the fluctuation display time for the ceiling and the stop result grasping process are executed in step S1812. In such a process, the fluctuation display time table for the normal map at the ceiling is read out, and the fluctuation display time of the current normal map main fluctuation and the normal map sub-variation is determined. As shown in FIG. 31 (b), in the variation display time table for normal drawing at the ceiling, a single variation display time is set regardless of the numerical information of the second variation type counter CS2. Further, the variable display time is the time (for example, 10 sec) that is assumed to be required from the passing of the game ball through the through gate 35A to the winning of the special winning opening 52, and the symbol is displayed after winning the special winning opening 52. The time is the sum of the time required to execute the big hit effect on the device 42, specifically, for example, 42 sec. On the other hand, in the stop result grasping process, the stop result corresponding to the result of the hit / fail determination process (step S1809) on the normal map side is grasped.

After executing the process of step S1811 or step S1812, in step S1813, the normal fluctuation display time grasped in step S1811 or the fluctuation display time for the ceiling grasped in step S1812 is set to the normal power timer. Execute the process to set the counter. Subsequent processing of steps S1814 to 1817 is the same as the processing of steps S512 to S515. However, in the present embodiment, when the variable command for normal drawing and the type command are set as output targets in step S1815, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the ceiling flag, and the command is set. If there is, that is, when the normal map sub-variation to be started this time is the normal map sub-variation at the ceiling, the information corresponding to the jackpot result regardless of the hit / fail judgment result on the normal map side and the information set in step S1812 above. Set to include information on the variable display time. Then, in the start processing of the variation display in step S1816, the variation display is started so that the stop result in the main variation of the normal figure becomes the stop result grasped in step S1811 or step S1812. After executing the process of step S1817, the process of starting the fluctuation of the normal map is terminated.

<Processing during fluctuation of normal map>
Next, the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32. The process of FIG. 32 is a process executed in place of the process of FIG.

In the present embodiment, similarly to steps S601 to S604 in the first embodiment, the process for updating the normal figure display unit 39 is executed in steps S1901 to S1904. Further, when the fluctuation display time has elapsed in step S1901, it is determined in step S1905 whether or not the special figure special electric counter is "0" as in step S605.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1905, in the present embodiment, it is determined in step S1906 whether or not "1" is set in the ceiling replacement flag, and if not, in step S1907 for normal drawing. Set the final stop command of to the output target.

If a negative determination is made in step S1905, an affirmative determination is made in step S1906, or the process of step S1907 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1908. The processing of steps S1908 to S1911 is the same as the processing of steps S607 to S610. After executing the process of step S1911, the process during the change of the present normal map is terminated.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the number of winnings to the through gate 35A reaches the ceiling, if the normal map sub-change is not performed, the normal map sub-change based on the hold information acquired at the time when the ceiling is reached is used. The game times corresponding to the ceiling are executed. Specifically, a long fluctuation display time is set in advance for the normal map sub-variation corresponding to the ceiling (step S1812 and step S1813), or an effect corresponding to the jackpot result is executed in advance (step S1815).

That is, in the present embodiment, when it is predicted that the request for the symbol change based on the normal figure special electric control and the request for the symbol change based on the special figure special electric control overlap at the ceiling, the normal figure is used in advance. The request for the symbol change based on the electric control is made to correspond to the request for the symbol change based on the special figure special electric control. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the possibility that it is necessary to change the variation display time or replace the effect after the duplication of the symbol variation request occurs. The configuration can be simplified.

It should be noted that the request for the symbol change based on the Fuzu-Public control, which was previously set as the request for the symbol change based on the special figure special electric control, actually corresponds to the request for the symbol change based on the special figure special electric control. If they are different (that is, if the hit / fail judgment on the special figure side is a wrong result), then the processing is performed in which the effect is replaced with the one corresponding to the request for the symbol change based on the actual special figure special electric control. Will be. Such processing will be described later, but even in this case, at least the variation display time is not changed, so that the variation display occurs when the duplicated design variation requests occur as in the first embodiment. The processing configuration is simplified rather than the configuration in which the time is changed or the effect is replaced.

Further, if the normal map sub-variation is performed, as in the first embodiment, the effect corresponding to the ceiling is performed by the normal map sub-variation currently being executed. However, in this embodiment, the final stop command is not output so as not to stop the sub-variation of the normal map currently being executed. By doing so, during the execution of the general map sub-variation based on the winning of the through gate 35A, when the winning of the through gate 35A is further generated and the winning corresponds to the ceiling, the special winning opening It is possible to avoid the event that the sub-variation of the ceiling map, which was being executed at the time of winning the prize in 52, has ended. Therefore, unlike the first embodiment, it is not necessary to set the processing (steps S1410 to S1413) in the case of the occurrence of such an event, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

<Acquisition information setting process>
Next, the acquisition information setting process on the special drawing side in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33. The process of FIG. 33 is a process executed in place of the process of FIG. 23.

In the present embodiment, first, in step S2001, it is confirmed whether or not the high frequency flag is "0" to determine whether or not the low frequency support mode is in progress. When the low frequency support mode is in effect (high frequency flag = 0), the main fluctuation of the normal map is being executed by confirming whether or not the normal power counter of the normal map is "0" in step S2002. It is determined whether or not it is. When the normal figure normal electric counter is not "0" but the normal figure main fluctuation is being executed, it is determined in the following step S2003 whether or not "1" is set in the ceiling flag. When "1" is set in the ceiling flag, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not "1" is set in the ceiling replacement flag.

If "1" is not set in the ceiling replacement flag in step S2004, the remaining fluctuation display time of the normal map main fluctuation currently being executed in step S2005 is grasped. In this process, the remaining fluctuation display time of the main fluctuation of the Fuzu can be grasped by reading the numerical information of the Fuden timer counter.

When the high frequency support mode is in effect instead of the low frequency support mode in step S2001, when the main fluctuation of the normal figure is not being executed in step S2002, and when "1" is not set in the ceiling flag in step S2003. Or, when "1" is set in the ceiling replacement flag in step S2004, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the current support mode is grasped in step S2006. This process is the same as the process related to grasping the variable display time in step S1201.

After executing the process of step S2005 or step S2006, the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2007, the result of stopping the special figure is grasped. Such a process is the same as the process for grasping the stop result in step S1201. In the following step S2008, a process of setting the remaining fluctuation display time of the normal map main fluctuation grasped in step S2005 or the fluctuation display time corresponding to the current support mode grasped in step S2006 to the special figure special electric timer counter is executed. ..

That is, if a prize is generated for the through gate 35A in a situation where the sub-variation of the normal map is not performed and the prize corresponds to the ceiling, the change start process of the normal map (FIG. 31) corresponds to the ceiling. The variable display time is set (step S1812 and step S1813). In this situation, when the winning game ball corresponding to the ceiling wins the special winning opening 52, the fluctuation display time of the special figure main fluctuation based on the winning to the special winning opening 52 corresponds to the above ceiling. It is set to be the remaining fluctuation display time of the normal map sub-variation (normal map main fluctuation) set in the fluctuation display time.

On the other hand, if a prize is awarded to the through gate 35A in a situation where the sub-variation of the normal map is performed and the prize corresponds to the ceiling, the pending information acquisition process on the normal map side (FIG. 30). Then, the ceiling replacement command is set as the output target so as not to end the sub-variation of the normal map during execution (step S1713), and the final stop command for the normal map is output as the output target in the process of changing the normal map (FIG. 32). Do not set to (step S1906: NO). In this situation, at the timing when the game ball that has won the prize corresponding to the ceiling wins the special winning opening 52, the main change of the normal map may have ended, but at least the sub change of the normal figure has ended. do not have. In this case, the fluctuation display time of the special figure main fluctuation is set to be the fluctuation display time corresponding to the support mode. Then, as in the first embodiment, the sound / light control device 300 side performs a process of matching the end timing of the game round on the symbol display device 42 side with the end timing of the special figure main variation.

In the following step S2009, it is determined whether or not the low frequency support mode is in progress. When in the low frequency support mode, it is determined in the following step S2010 whether or not "1" is set in the ceiling replacement flag. If "1" is set in the ceiling replacement flag, the ceiling replacement flag is cleared to "0" in the following step S2011.

When the high frequency support mode is used instead of the low frequency support mode in step S2009, or after the processing of step S2011 is executed, the variable command and the type command are output to the sound / light control device 300 in step S2012. Set.

If "1" is not set in the ceiling replacement flag even in the low frequency support mode in step S2010, or after the process of step S2012 is executed, the variation display of the special figure display unit 38 is displayed in step S2013. It starts, and in the following step S2014, 1 is added to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter, and then the acquisition information setting process ends. The processing of step S2013 and step S2014 is the same as the processing of step S1205 and step S1206.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the change command and the type command at the time of special figure change replace the effect of the normal figure sub change being executed in the low frequency support mode (“1” is set in the ceiling replacement flag. If there is), it is transmitted to the sound / light control device 300.

That is, if the normal map sub-change is not performed at the timing when the through gate 35A corresponding to the ceiling is won in the low frequency support mode, the change command and the type command at the time of the special figure change are not output. .. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the winning / failing judgment based on the winning of the special winning opening 52 is a wrong result, in such a situation, the game times corresponding to the ceiling based on the winning of the through gate 35A, That is, the structure is such that a production for a big hit is performed.

This is because the winning probability on the special figure side is set to almost 100%, and by doing so, the processing load can be reduced. However, for example, when changing the winning probability on the special drawing side, it is preferable to replace the effect according to the winning / failing lottery result on the special drawing side at the time of the ceiling.

<Production determination process executed by the sound / light control device 300>
Next, the effect determination process by the MPU 302 of the sound light control device 300 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34. The process of FIG. 34 is a process executed by replacing the process of FIG. 25.

First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not a change command and a type command at the time of normal map change are received. When these commands are received, it is determined in the following step S2102 whether or not the low frequency support mode is in progress, and in steps S2103 to S2107, the sub-variations in the normal diagram are the same as in steps S1403 to S1407. Executes the process to start. In such a process, an effect pattern (an effect pattern corresponding to the jackpot result) in which the winning of the through gate 35A corresponds to the ceiling is determined in a situation where the sub-variation of the normal figure is not performed.

When a negative determination is made in step S2101 or step S2106, or after the process of step S2105 or step S2107 is executed, it is determined whether or not the ceiling replacement command is received in step S2108.

If the ceiling replacement command has been received, in the following step S2109, it is determined whether or not the running normal map sub-variation corresponds to the support winning, and if not, it goes to step S2110. And execute the effect replacement process. In such a process, a process for replacing the content of the effect of the normal map sub-variation determined and started in the processes of steps S2103 to S2105 with the effect corresponding to the jackpot result is executed as the effect corresponding to the ceiling.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 35, it is determined in step S2201 whether or not the upper symbol sequence Z1 is undergoing high-speed fluctuation. When the upper symbol row Z1 is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, it means that none of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 has stopped yet. In this case, in the following step S2202, the end restriction process is performed and then the effect is replaced. End the process. The end restriction process of step S2202 is a process of maintaining all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a state of high-speed fluctuation without advancing the effect with the effect pattern determined in steps SS2103 to S2105.

If a negative determination is made in step S2201, it is determined in step S2203 whether or not the lower symbol sequence Z3 is undergoing high-speed fluctuation. When a negative determination is made in step S2201 and the lower symbol row Z3 is undergoing high-speed fluctuation in step S2202, it means that only the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped or undergoing low-speed fluctuation. In this case, step S2204 The re-variation process of the above symbol string Z1 is executed at, the end restriction process of step S2202 is executed, and then the effect replacement process is terminated. The process for revariating the upper symbol string Z1 is the same as the process related to the upper symbol string Z1 in step S1604.

If a negative determination is made in step S2203, it is determined in step S2205 whether or not the middle symbol sequence Z2 is undergoing high-speed fluctuation. The case of high-speed fluctuation in step S2205 means that the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are stopped or the lower symbol row Z3 is in low-speed fluctuation. In this case, the upper and lower symbol rows Z2206 are moved up and down. The re-variation process of the symbol columns Z1 and Z3 is executed, the end restriction process of step S2202 is executed, and then the effect replacement process is terminated. The process of step S2206 is the same as the process of step S1604.

If the middle symbol row Z2 is not undergoing high-speed fluctuation in step S2205, the revariation processing of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is executed in step S2207, the end restriction processing of step S2202 is executed, and then this The production replacement process is completed. The process of step S2207 is the same as the process of step S1606.

That is, by receiving the ceiling replacement command, a process is performed to return the fluctuations of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the currently executed normal map sub-variation to the state of high-speed fluctuation, and the state of the high-speed fluctuation is changed. Be maintained. This state during high-speed fluctuation is subsequently released based on the reception of the fluctuation command and the type command at the time of special map fluctuation based on the winning of the special winning opening 52.

Returning to the explanation of the staging determination process (FIG. 34), if the ceiling replacement command has not been received in step S2108, if the normal map sub-variation being executed in step S2109 corresponds to the support winning, or step. After executing the process of S2110, the process proceeds to step S2111. In step S2111, it is determined whether or not a change command and a type command at the time of special figure change have been received. When these commands are received, it is determined in the following step S2112 whether or not the low frequency support mode is in progress.

When the low-frequency support mode is in step S2112, the sub-variation of the normal map during high-speed fluctuation is changed to the variation based on each command at the time of special map change in the following step S2113. Execute the replacement process. Specifically, the effect pattern table for the special figure sub-variation (FIG. 26 (b)), each command received this time, and the subsequent effects of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 during high-speed fluctuation are determined. In this case, no matter which effect pattern is selected in steps S2103 to S2105, the effect is in a state of high-speed fluctuation in the effect replacement process (step S2110), so that the process is determined by the process of step S2113. The effect pattern is determined regardless of the effect pattern and the stop symbol determined in steps S2103 to S2105.

After executing the process of step S2113, the process of changing the fluctuation display time of the normal map sub-variation currently being executed in step S2114 is executed. In such processing, the numerical information of the progress counter is confirmed, and if it is 0, that is, the fluctuation display time of the normal map sub-variation input in step S2101 has already passed, but the high-speed fluctuation is being performed by the processing of step S2110. If the state is maintained, the process of adding the numerical information of the fluctuation display time included in the fluctuation command received this time to the progress counter is executed. Further, when the numerical information of the progress counter is not 0, that is, when the fluctuation display time of the normal map sub-variation input in step S2101 has not yet elapsed, the same as the process of step S1504 of FIG. 27. , Executes the process of adding the numerical information corresponding to the time (period) obtained by subtracting the remaining fluctuation display time of the normal map sub-variation from the fluctuation display time of the special map sub-variation to the numerical information of the current progress counter. ..

On the other hand, when the high frequency support mode is used instead of the low frequency support mode in step S2112, the processes of steps S2115 to S2118 are executed in the same manner as the processes of steps S1416 to S1419.

If a negative determination is made in step S2111 or step S2117, an affirmative determination is made in step S2116, or after the processing of step S2114 or step S2118 is executed, other processing is executed in step S2119, and then this effect determination is made. End the process. The process of step S2119 is the same as the process of step S1420.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, regarding the relationship between the winning of the through gate 35A (general drawing winning), the winning of the special winning opening 52 (special drawing winning), and the variable display based on these winnings in the present embodiment. explain.

If the prize for the through gate 35A that occurred at the timing of t1, which is the situation where the hit / fail judgment on the normal map side is not performed, corresponds to the ceiling, in the normal map main fluctuation and the normal map sub-variation, the ceiling The corresponding variable display time (TB1) and stop result are determined. After that, when a prize is generated in the special winning opening 52 at the timing of t2, the remaining fluctuation display time (TB2) of the normal map main fluctuation started at the timing of t1 is the fluctuation display time (TB2) of the special map main fluctuation this time. It is set as TB3). As a result, the special figure main change ends at the timing of t3, which is the timing at which the normal figure main change and the normal figure sub change end.

Here, if the value of the first Fuzu winning counter reaches the ceiling value during the execution of the Fuzu sub-change due to the previous Fuzu winning, the Fuzu sub-change before reaching the ceiling has started. In addition, there is a risk that the sub-variation of the normal map due to reaching the ceiling will not start, and the sub-variation of the normal map before reaching the ceiling will end before the special map prize. In that respect, as described above, since the ceiling replacement flag is set to "1" (step S1712), the end of the normal map sub-variation before reaching the ceiling is restricted (step S1906: YES), and therefore this ceiling. It is possible to replace the sub-variation of the normal map before reaching with the production corresponding to the ceiling.

That is, if the winning of the through gate 35A generated at the timing of t5 corresponds to the ceiling during the fluctuation of the main fluctuation of the normal map triggered by the winning of the normal map generated at t4, the winning at the timing of t5 is used. Although the hold information is not acquired depending on the passage to the through gate 35A, the effect corresponding to the ceiling is performed in the normal map sub-variation started at the timing of t4. In this case, first, "1" is set in the ceiling replacement flag at the timing of t5, and a process for controlling so that the subsequent sub-variations in the normal map do not end is performed. Then, the final stop time (TB5) of the normal map sub-variation started at the timing of t4 is determined by the winning of the special winning opening 52 that occurs at the timing of t7 thereafter. As a result, although the normal map main variation ends at the timing of t6, the normal map sub variation does not end (replaced with the special map sub variation), and the special map main variation ends at the timing of t8. Production (replaced special figure sub-variation) ends.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

In the special accessory 33, when the number of game balls that have passed through the through gate 35A reaches a predetermined number, that is, when the ball reaches the ceiling and wins a prize in the special winning opening 52, it starts based on passing through the through gate 35A. The effect for the game times to be performed is configured to start as the effect for the game times corresponding to winning a prize in the special winning opening 52. More specifically, when the ceiling flag is set in step S1810 in the normal map change start process (FIG. 31), the change display time for the ceiling is grasped in step S1812 and the normal map sub-variation is performed. It was configured to start. Normally, the presence or absence of reach display in the normal map sub-variation is determined independently of the value of the first normal map winning counter, but if the reach display does not occur in the normal map sub-variation corresponding to the ceiling. If it is decided, there is a possibility that the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed without the reach line already being formed at the timing of winning the special winning opening 52 as in the first embodiment. Can occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the reach display is set to occur in the sub-variation of the normal map corresponding to the ceiling, and the stop symbol of the middle symbol column Z2 during the change is replaced. By doing so, it is possible to smoothly replace the game times corresponding to the ceiling, and it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player. However, in the case of this configuration, at the start of the normal map sub-variation, it is necessary to perform a process for grasping whether or not it corresponds to the ceiling that occurs only once in 256 times, so that the processing load on the normal map sub-variation side is required. From the viewpoint of reducing the above, the first embodiment is preferable.

The following concerns may arise even in the configuration for setting the normal map sub-variation corresponding to the ceiling as described above. That is, the first normal map winning counter is configured to be counted every time the through gate 35A passes regardless of the number of executions of the normal map sub-variation, but the normal map sub-variation that does not correspond to the ceiling is being executed. In addition, the passage of the through gate 35A corresponding to the ceiling may occur. In such a case, it is conceivable to end the running Fuzu sub-variation and then start the Fuzu sub-variation corresponding to the ceiling. However, with this configuration, the timing of entering the special accessory 33 And the start timing of the sub-variation of the ceiling will be different. As a result, the player recognizes that the player has reached the ceiling when the sub-variation of the fuzu is started without further entering the special accessory 33 after the sub-variation of the fuzu during execution is completed. It will end up. If this is the case, the degree of attention of the sub-variation of the normal map will be reduced. Therefore, in such a case, it is configured to replace the sub-variation of the normal map with the one corresponding to the ceiling without ending the sub-variation of the normal map being executed. As a result, the ceiling function using the special accessory 33 can be suitably realized without causing a decrease in the degree of attention to the sub-variation of the normal map.

As described above, the fluctuation display time of the normal map sub-variation corresponding to the ceiling is set to be long, and the variation on the special map side (special map sub-variation and the special map sub-variation) executed based on the winning of the special winning opening 52 The variation display time of the special map main variation) is determined as the remaining variation display time of the normal map main variation at the timing when the special winning opening 52 is won. As a result, in the sub-variation of the normal map corresponding to the ceiling, it is only necessary to replace the symbol that is changing without having to change the fluctuation display time, and it is possible to reduce the processing load at the time of replacement. Become. With this configuration, there is a discrepancy between the end timing of the variation display (normal map sub-variation and special map sub-variation) on the symbol display device 42 side in the game times corresponding to the ceiling and the transition timing to the open / close execution mode. Not only that, but also the fluctuation display on the normal map display unit 39 side (normal map main fluctuation), the fluctuation display on the special map display units 38a and 38b side (special map main fluctuation), and the fluctuation display on the symbol display device 42 side (the fluctuation display on the symbol display device 42 side). It is possible to synchronize the end timing of any of the fluctuation displays with the normal map sub-variation and the special map sub-variation), and it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player.

<Third embodiment>
In this embodiment, the number of reserved sheets on the normal drawing side is different from that of the first and second embodiments. Hereinafter, different configurations will be described.

First, the normal drawing holding area 206 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 37.

The normal figure holding area 206 includes a first area 206a, a second area 206b, a third area 206c, and a fourth area 206d, and the normal number counter C4, according to the winning history of the through gates 35A and 35B, The numerical information of the second reach random number counter C5 and the second variation type counter CS2 is stored in any of the areas 206a to 206d as the reserved information on the normal drawing side.

In this case, in the first area 206a to the fourth area 206d, when the through gates 35A and 35B are awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first area 206a → the second area 206b → the third area 206c → the third area 206c. Numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of 4 areas 206d. By providing the four areas 206a to 206d in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the through gates 35A and 35B can be reserved and stored.

The number that can be reserved and stored in the normal drawing holding area 206 is not limited to four, and may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more.

Further, the normal drawing holding area 206 is provided with an execution area 207 for the normal drawing as in the first and second embodiments. The execution area 207 for the normal map is an area in which the hold information to be determined for support is stored when the variable display is started by the normal map display unit 39. Specifically, when the variable display of the normal map display unit 39 is started, the hold information stored in the first area 206a of the normal map hold area 206 is moved to the execution area 207.

Although detailed explanation by the figure is omitted, the game board 24 holds the normal map corresponding to the through gates 35A and 35B in the area visible to the player (specifically, the position adjacent to the normal map display unit 39). A display unit is provided. The normal figure hold display unit is composed of, for example, LEDs, and the number of holds when the game ball wins the through gates 35A and 35B is displayed by lighting the normal figure hold display unit. Specifically, when the number of holdings is 4, the 4 holding display units of the normal figure are turned on, and when the number of holdings is 0, the holding display part of 0 drawing is turned on. .. When changing the number of holdable items in the normal figure hold area 206 as described above, it is preferable to change the number of normal figure hold display units.

<Acquisition process of pending information on the general map side>
Next, the process of acquiring the reserved information on the normal drawing side in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38. The process of FIG. 38 is a process executed in place of the process of FIG.

In the present embodiment, first, the processes of steps S2301 to S2305 are executed in the same manner as the processes of steps S401 to S405 (steps S1701 to S1705).

In step S2306, it is determined whether or not the total number NS of the reserved information on the normal map side stored in the normal map hold area 206 is less than the upper limit of 4. If the total number NS of the reserved information on the normal map side is less than 4, 1 is added to the total number NS of the reserved information on the normal map side in step S2307. In the following step S2308, each numerical information of the normal electric random number counter C4, the second reach random number counter C5, and the second variation type counter CS2 is stored in the normal figure holding area 206.

If a negative determination is made in step S2306, or after the process of step S2308 is executed, the process related to the ceiling notice is executed in step S2309 and step S2310. Such processing is the same as the processing of step S408 and step S409 (step S1708 and step S1709).

In the following step S2311, the first general figure winning counter is confirmed, it is determined whether or not it is the numerical information (256) corresponding to the ceiling, and if it is not the numerical information corresponding to the ceiling, the present acquisition process is performed as it is. finish. If the numerical information corresponds to the ceiling, the process proceeds to step S2312.

In step S2312, it is determined whether or not the total number NS of the reserved information on the normal drawing side is less than the upper limit of 4, and if it is less than 4, each numerical value is in step S2313 and in step S2308. Ceiling information is stored in the area where the information is stored. On the other hand, when the total number NS of the reserved information on the normal drawing side is 4, which is the upper limit, the ceiling information is stored in the fourth area 206d in step S2314.

After executing the process of step S2313 or step S2314, the first general figure winning counter is cleared in step S2315, and then the acquisition process is terminated.

<Public map fluctuation start processing>
Next, the normal map fluctuation start processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39 (a). The process of FIG. 39 (a) is a process executed in place of the process of FIG.

The normal map variation start process in the present embodiment has substantially the same processing configuration as the normal map variation start process in the second embodiment. Specifically, first, the processes of steps S2401 to S2404 are executed in the same manner as the processes of steps S1801 to S1804.

In step S2405, it is determined whether or not the total number NS of the reserved information on the normal drawing side is 1 or more, and if it is 1 or more, the data setting process is executed in the following step S2406.

In the data setting process, the total number NS of the reserved information on the normal map side is subtracted by 1, and the data stored in the first area 206a of the normal map reserved area 206 (that is, the reserved information) is moved to the execution area 207. After that, the shift process of the normal figure holding area 206 is executed. In the shift process, the hold information stored in the first area 206a of the normal figure hold area 206 is cleared, and the second area 206b → the first area 206a, the third area 206c → the second area 206b, and the fourth area The pending information in each area is shifted, such as 206d → the third area 206c. In these processes, the ceiling information stored in step S2313 or step S2314 is also shifted in the same manner as the hold information.

The processing of steps S2407 to S2418 is the same as the processing of steps S1806 to S1817 in the second embodiment. However, in the present embodiment, in step S2411, it is determined whether or not the information moved to the execution area 207 for the normal drawing includes the ceiling information instead of the ceiling flag. Check if the fluctuation corresponds to the ceiling.

Also in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39 (b), the variable display time table for the normal drawing at the ceiling has a single variable display time.

<Acquisition information setting process>
Next, the acquisition information setting process on the special figure side in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40. The process of FIG. 40 is a process executed in place of the process of FIG. 23.

First, in step S2501, the high frequency flag is confirmed to determine whether or not the low frequency support mode is set. In the following step S2502, it is determined whether or not the normal map main fluctuation is being executed by confirming whether or not the normal map normal electric counter is "0". If the Fuzu Fuden counter is not "0" and is executing the Fuzu main fluctuation, it is determined in the following step S2503 whether or not the ceiling information is stored in the execution area 207. It is determined whether or not the effect corresponding to the ceiling should be executed in the sub-variation of the normal map during execution. If there is ceiling information in the execution area 207, in step S2504, the remaining fluctuation display time of the main fluctuation of the normal map being executed is grasped. Such processing is the same as the processing of step S2005 in FIG. 33.

If there is no ceiling information in the execution area 207 in step S2503, it is determined in step S2505 whether or not the ceiling information is stored in any of the areas 206a to 206d of the normal drawing reservation area 206. When the ceiling information is stored in any of the areas 206a to 206d, in the following step S2506, the fluctuation display time of the hold information in each area from the first area 206a to the area where the ceiling information is stored is grasped. do. In such processing, it is possible to grasp the information of the fluctuation display time of each area by using the numerical information of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 of each area and the fluctuation display time table for normal drawing in the low frequency support mode. In the following step S2507, similarly to step S2504, the remaining fluctuation display time of the running normal map main fluctuation is grasped.

If the high frequency support mode is used instead of the low frequency support mode in step S2501, the normal map main fluctuation is not being executed in step S2502, or any of the areas 206a to 206d of the normal map holding area 206 is performed in step S2505. If the ceiling information is not stored in the ceiling information, the variable display time corresponding to the support mode is grasped in step S2508.

After executing any of the processes of step S2504, step S2507, and step S2508, the special figure stop result is grasped in step S2509. In the following step S2510, a process of setting the fluctuation display time grasped in step S2504, step S2506 and step S2507, or step S2508 to the special figure special electric timer counter is executed. That is, in step S2510, the remaining fluctuation display time of the normal map main fluctuation grasped in step S2504, the fluctuation display time of each area 206a to 206d grasped in step S2506, and the normal map main fluctuation grasped in step S2507. Either the total of the remaining fluctuation display time of the above or the fluctuation display time corresponding to the support mode grasped in step S2508 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter.

In the following step S2511, it is determined whether or not the mode is the low frequency support mode, and if the mode is not the low frequency support mode but the high frequency support mode, the variable command and the type command are transmitted to the sound / light control device 300 in the step S2512. Set as the output target to. In the case of the low frequency support mode in step S2511, or after the processing of step S2512 is executed, the variation display of the special figure display unit 38 (special map main variation) is started in step S2513, and the special figure display unit 38 is started in step S2514. Figure Adds 1 to the special electric counter, and then ends the acquisition information setting process.

That is, in the present embodiment, the change command and the type command at the time of special figure change are not output during the low frequency support mode. Such a configuration is the same as the processing at the time of ceiling except the situation where the ceiling replacement command is output in the second embodiment. That is, also in the present embodiment, in the effect on the symbol display device 42 side corresponding to the ceiling, the effect corresponding to the ceiling (effect for the jackpot result) is performed regardless of the result of the hit / fail determination on the special figure side.

<Production determination process executed by the sound / light control device 300>
Next, the effect determination process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41. The process of FIG. 41 is a process executed by replacing the process of FIG. 25.

In the present embodiment, the processes of steps S2601 to S2607 are executed in the same manner as in steps S1401 to S14107.

In step S2608, it is determined whether or not a change command and a type command at the time of special figure change have been received. When these commands are received, it is determined in step S2609 whether or not the low frequency support mode is set. When the low frequency support mode is not used, the same processing as in steps S1416 to S1419 is performed in steps S2610 to S2613.

When the high-frequency support mode is used instead of the low-frequency support mode in step S2609, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2611, a negative determination is made in step S2612, or after the processing of step S2613 is executed, step S2614 is performed. After executing other processes, the present effect determination process is terminated.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the holding information can be stored separately from the execution area 207 for the normal drawing in the normal drawing holding area 206, so that the effect replacement at the ceiling in the second embodiment occurs. do not have. As a result, it is possible to realize smooth progress of the game by making the reserved information storable, and to reduce the storage capacity by simplifying the processing configuration.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the game board 24 is different from the first to third embodiments. Further, in the first to third embodiments, the winning / failing determination on the special drawing side is configured to be triggered by winning the special winning opening 52 or winning the operating opening 34, but this is changed. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the actuating opening 34 is not provided, and as a winning opening for winning a prize in the special accessory 33 other than at the time of the ceiling, a winning opening on the special drawing side (instead of the general winning opening 53). Is provided. That is, the game ball that has entered the special accessory 33 wins in either the special winning opening 52 or the special drawing side winning opening provided, and the winning / failing determination on the special drawing side is performed. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 224 in the present embodiment will be described in detail.

As shown in FIG. 42 (a), in the game board 224 of the present embodiment, the through gate 35B is not provided in the right side region PE3, but only the through gate 35A in the left side region PE2 is provided. The through gate 35A is provided directly above the ball passage port 33a in the special accessory 33, as in the first to third embodiments, and all the game balls that have won the through gate 35A are the special accessory 33. Enter the ball.

As shown in FIGS. 42 (b) and 42 (c), the through gate 35A is provided with a general electric accessory 35d as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The general electric accessory 35d is connected to a general electric drive unit (not shown) mounted on the back side of the game board 224, and the general electric accessory 35d is connected to the general electric drive unit (not shown). A guided state (support state or guide state) in which the game ball is driven and easily entered, and a non-guided state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than in the guided state shown in FIG. 42 (c) (support state or guide state). It is placed in either the unsupported state or the unguided state).

When the general electric accessory 35d is arranged in a non-inductive state, both guide pieces stand up in parallel with the ball passing hole penetrating in the vertical direction in the through gate 35A, and stand from directly above the through gate 35A. Only the falling game ball can win the through gate 35A. Further, when the general electric accessory 35d is arranged in the guided state, the rotating tip sides of both guide pieces are separated from each other, and a game ball falling from diagonally above the through gate 35A can also win a prize in the through gate 35A. That is, regardless of whether the general electric accessory 35d is arranged in the non-inductive state or the inductive state, although it is possible to win a prize in the through gate 35A, it is in the inductive state as compared with the case where it is arranged in the non-inductive state. When it is arranged, it is easier to win a prize in the through gate 35A. In other words, regardless of whether the Fuden accessory 35d is placed in the non-induced state or the guided state, it is possible to enter the special accessory 33, but it is better than the case where it is arranged in the non-induced state. It is easier to enter the special accessory 33 when it is placed in the guided state.

It should be noted that, in a state where it is easy for a game ball to win a prize in the through gate 35A (special accessory 33), and in a state where it is not impossible to win a prize but it is more difficult to win a prize than in a state where the above-mentioned prize is likely to occur. As a configuration in which the accessory 35d is switched, switching is performed between a state in which a prize is likely to occur by moving or rotating the universal accessory 35d in the front-back direction and a state in which a prize is less likely to occur. It may be configured. Further, the general electric accessory 35d may be inadequate, and switching between a state in which a prize is likely to occur and a state in which a prize is less likely to occur may be performed by the displacement of the through gate 35A itself.

Based on the winning of the through gate 35A, a lottery of the support execution mode in which the above-mentioned general electric accessory 35d is switched from the non-inductive state to the inductive state is performed. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the through gate 35A, and a variable display of a pattern is performed on the general drawing display unit 39. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the support winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display is terminated, the mode shifts to the support execution mode. In the support execution mode, the general electric accessory 35d is in the guided state in a predetermined mode. In the present embodiment, the general electric accessory 34a is not provided. That is, in the first to third embodiments, the universal electric accessory 34a is provided to support the winning of the operating port 34, but in the present embodiment, the special accessory 33 is provided with the winning support. A general electric accessory 35d is provided for this purpose.

The special accessory 33 in the present embodiment is provided with a second special winning opening 253 instead of the general winning opening 53 in the first to third embodiments, and the game ball enters the special accessory 33. (When passing through the through gate 35A), the special winning opening 52 is won once every 256 times, and the other prizes are given to the second special winning opening 253. In the following description, the special winning opening 52 is also referred to as the first special winning opening 52.

A big hit lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the first special winning opening 52 or the second special winning opening 253, and the lottery result is displayed on the special figure display units 38a and 38b of the lottery result display unit 37 and the symbol display device 42. Explicit through.

In the first special figure display unit 38a, as in the first to third embodiments, a big hit lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the first special winning opening 52, so that a variable display or a predetermined display of the pattern is displayed. Will be done. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, the second special figure display unit 38b performs a variable display or a predetermined display of the pattern by performing a big hit lottery triggered by winning a prize in the second special winning opening 253. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the actuating port 34 is not provided. That is, it can be said that the second special winning opening 253 is provided in place of the operating opening 34 in the first to third embodiments.

If the winner is a big hit lottery based on winning the first special winning opening 52 and the second special winning opening 253, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. The opening / closing execution mode in the present embodiment is set to a substantial hit mode and a substantial off mode. In the substantial hit mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened, and the special electric winning device 32 is won by operating the launching operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down to the right area PE3 provided with the special electric winning device 32. Is a mode that enables. For example, in the substantial hit mode, the upper limit of the number of round games is 7 rounds, and the open duration of each round is set to 29.5 sec. Further, in the substantially off mode, although the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state, even if the launching operation device 28 is operated so as to flow the game ball down to the right region PE3, the special electric winning device 32 does not or occurs. It is a difficult mode. For example, in the substantially out-of-round mode, the upper limit of the number of round games is one round, and the open duration of the round is set to 0.6 sec.

Here, the configuration for performing various lottery in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45.

As shown in FIG. 43, as for the reserved number of the winning openings 52 and 253 in the present embodiment, the number of winnings in the first special winning opening 52 is reserved, while the number of winnings in the second special winning opening 253 is reserved. The number is reserved up to the maximum number of four. That is, the second special figure holding area 204 in the present embodiment includes the first area 204a, the second area 204b, the third area 204c, and the fourth area 204d. Then, at the timing when the first special winning opening 52 is won, various counters used for the winning / failing lottery for the special drawing are stored in the first special drawing holding area 103, and the second special winning opening 253 is won. At the timing when the above occurs, the various counters are stored in any of the areas 204a to 204d of the second special figure holding area 204.

In this case, in the first area 204a to the fourth area 204d, when the second special winning opening 253 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first area 204a → the second area 204b → the third area 204c → The fourth area 204d is stored in chronological order.

The number of items that can be stored in the second special figure holding area 204 is not limited to four, and may be arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more. , It may be singular as in the first to third embodiments. However, in order to realize the playability described later in the present embodiment, it is preferable that the number is at least smaller than the predetermined number (256) corresponding to the ceiling.

Further, as the holding area on the normal drawing side in this embodiment, the normal drawing holding area 206 in the third embodiment is adopted, and up to four winning histories of game balls to the through gate 35A are held and stored. It is supposed to be done. Also in the present embodiment, the number of holdable storages in the normal figure hold area 206 is not limited to four, and is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more. It may be singular as in the first and second embodiments. Further, the number may be 0 as in the first and second embodiments. Further, the number of the second special figure holding area 204 and the number of the normal figure holding area 206 do not have to be the same, and may be different numbers.

Next, the configuration related to the winning / failing lottery in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 44.

As shown in FIG. 44 (a), as in the first to third embodiments, a common hit / fail table for the special figure is set, and the game ball is the first special winning opening 52 or the first special winning opening 52 or the first. 2 The winning / failing lottery is performed based on the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599) acquired at the timing of winning the special winning opening 253. As the hit / fail result, a jackpot result and a missed result are set, and the number of random numbers resulting in the jackpot is set to 599. That is, also in this embodiment, the probability that a jackpot result will be obtained by referring to the hit / fail table for the special figure is 599/600, which is almost 100% jackpot result.

As the distribution table of the type of the jackpot result when the jackpot result is obtained, the distribution table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 44 (b) and the distribution table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 43 (c). A minute table and is set. The distribution table for the first special drawing is a table that is referred to when a big hit result is obtained based on the winning of the first special winning opening 52. Further, the distribution table for the second special drawing is a table that is referred to when a big hit result is obtained based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253. Then, in each distribution table, a real hit result A and a real hit result B for shifting to the open / close execution mode of the above-mentioned real hit mode, and a real off result for shifting to the open / close execution mode of the real off mode are set. There is. In this embodiment, the jackpot type counter C6 is set as a counter for distribution in the jackpot result. The jackpot type counter C6 is a loop counter similar to other counters for lottery (value = 0 to 119).

The support mode set after the open / close execution mode is different between the real hit result A and the real hit result B. Specifically, also in the present embodiment, as the support mode, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency in which the general electric accessory 35d is in the induced state per unit time is relatively high or low. It is set.

When the above distribution result is a substantial hit result A, the support mode after the corresponding open / close execution mode is completed is set to the high frequency support mode regardless of the type of the previous support mode. This high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the transition. When the distribution result is the actual hit result B, the support mode after the corresponding open / close execution mode ends is set to the low frequency support mode regardless of the type of the previous support mode.

If the distribution result is substantially out of alignment, the transition to the support mode is not performed after the corresponding open / close execution mode is completed. That is, in the present embodiment, the transition of the support mode is performed after the opening / closing execution mode when the actual hit result A or the substantial hit result B is obtained, and when the number of games reaches the end reference number after shifting to the high frequency support mode. And is done to.

Also in this embodiment, the support lottery for whether or not to control the Fuden accessory 35d to the induced state is performed using the Fuden random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the winning probability of the support lottery and the guidance mode of the general electric accessory 35d when the support is won are different depending on the level of the support mode.

Specifically, in the normal figure pass / fail table referred to in the low frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 45 (a), a short-time result and a miss result are set as the pass / fail result. When the lottery result is a short-time result, the general electric accessory 35d is in the guided state once, and the duration of the guided state is set to 0.3 sec. Therefore, the duration of the guided state is shorter than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball, and even if the support is won, the through gate 35A will not be awarded, or if it is generated, at most one prize will be awarded. It is set to be. Of the "0 to 719" values of the normal electric random number counter C4, "0 to 35" corresponds to the short-time result, and "36 to 719" corresponds to the off result.

On the other hand, in the normal figure hit / fail table referred to in the high frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), a long-time result and a missed result are set as the hit / miss result. When the lottery result is a long-time result, the general electric accessory 35d is in the guided state three times, and the duration of the guided state is set to 3 sec. Therefore, the duration of the guided state is longer than the firing cycle of the game ball, and the guided state is set a plurality of times (three times). Therefore, by winning the support, a plurality of prizes may be generated in the through gate 35A. As for the value of the normal electric random number counter C4, "0 to 575" corresponds to the long-time result and "576 to 719" corresponds to the off result among "0 to 719". That is, the probability of winning the support is set higher in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode.

For details of each distribution table, in the distribution table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 44 (b), when the value of the jackpot type counter C6 is "0 to 59", the actual hit result A is obtained. If it is "60 to 118", the result is a substantial hit result B, and if it is "119", the result is a substantial deviation. On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 44 (c), when the value of the jackpot type counter C6 is "0", the actual hit result is A, and when it is "1 to 119". The result is substantially off. That is, in the distribution table for the first special figure and the distribution table for the second special figure, the distribution table for the first special figure is set with a higher probability that the actual hit result A is obtained. The distribution table for the second special figure is set with a higher probability that the result will be substantially out of alignment.

As for the playability of the present embodiment configured as described above, by winning a prize in the through gate 35A, one of the first special winning opening 52 and the second special winning opening 253 is awarded, and these It shifts to the open / close execution mode almost 100% based on the winning of. In the first special winning opening 52 and the second special winning opening 253, although the probability of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode of the actual hit mode is set higher when the first special winning opening 52 is won, the special bonus is set. Due to the ceiling function of 33, the first special winning opening 52 is awarded only once in a predetermined number of times (256 times), and the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode of the substantial hit mode is limited.

In other words, normally (except at the time of the ceiling), the prize is won in the second special winning opening 253, and based on the winning in the second special winning opening 253, it is distributed to the real hit result A or the real hit result B. It shifts to the open / close execution mode of the real hit mode where the prize ball can be obtained. In addition, even if the result is substantially out of order based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253, by winning the first special winning opening 52 at the 256th time, the opening and closing of the real hit mode is executed with high probability. Move to mode. In this way, by utilizing the ceiling function of the special accessory 33 and the difference in the lottery mode of the plurality of winning openings 52 and 253 provided in the special accessory 33, the player's motivation to continue the game is increased. Is possible, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, as already described, in the high frequency support mode, the frequency of winning the through gate 35A, that is, the frequency of entering the special accessory 33 is high. In this case, although the maximum number of holdings based on winning the second special winning opening 253 is 4, it can be expected that more than the maximum number of holdings will be entered in relation to the digestion timing of the game times. As a result, it is possible to reach the ceiling earlier than the number of times the game is executed (to win the first special winning opening 52).

<Acquisition process of pending information on the general map side>
Next, the process of acquiring the reserved information on the normal drawing side in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The process of FIG. 46 is a process executed in place of the process of FIG.

In the present embodiment, first, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first general figure winning flag. As described above, since the through gate 35B is not provided in the present embodiment, if "1" is not set in the first general figure winning flag, the present acquisition process is terminated as it is. In step S2702, the first normal figure winning flag is cleared, and in the following step S2703, a process of adding 1 to the normal figure winning counter is executed.

In the following step S2704, it is determined whether or not the total number NS of the reserved information on the normal drawing side is less than 4. If it is less than 4, the process of adding 1 to the total number of pending information NS on the normal drawing side and updating it is executed in the following step S2705, and the numerical information of the normal electric random number counter C4 is normally used in the following step S2706. Figure Stored in the hold area 206.

In the following step S2707, the hold display lottery process is executed.

Here, in the present embodiment, the display screen 42a of the symbol display device 42 is provided with an area for holding display. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 47, a hold display area 42b is provided below each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen 42a, and the hold display area 42b is the second special figure hold area 204. It is divided into four display areas, that is, a first unit hold display area 42c, a second unit hold display area 42d, a third unit hold display area 42e, and a fourth unit hold display area 42f, corresponding to the upper limit number of holds. ..

When the total number PS of the hold information of both special figure hold areas 103 and 204 is 4 or 5, the hold image is displayed in each unit hold display area 42c to 42f, and both special figure hold areas 103. When the total number PS of the hold information of, 204 is 1, the hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area 42c.

That is, although the maximum number of the total number PS of the reserved information stored in the two special figure holding areas 103 and 204 is 5, the total number PS is 5 because the game ball has a predetermined frequency (1/256). ) Only when the first special winning opening 52 is won (in this case, the total number of reserved information PS2 in the second special drawing reserved area 204 is 4). Therefore, the hold display area 42b is provided with only four unit hold display areas, and the total number of hold information in both special figure hold areas 103 and 204 is displayed regardless of whether the PS is 5 or 4. The number of pending images to be displayed is four. Further, the image for holding is not started to be displayed when the winning of both special winning openings 52 and 253 is started, but is started to be displayed when the winning of the through gate 35A is triggered. As a result, the upper limit of the hold information that is held and stored based on the entry into the special bonus 33 is apparently four, and the player can be made to think of the special bonus 33 as one winning opening.

Then, using the numerical information of the first general drawing winning counter, the game ball actually determines which of the first special winning opening 52 and the second special winning opening 253 will be won. It is configured to specify before winning a prize in the winning opening 52 or the second special winning opening 253 and display the corresponding pending image. As the image for holding, the first holding image P1 is displayed when the winning of the first special winning opening 52 is supported, and the second holding is displayed when corresponding to the winning of the second special winning opening 253. Image P2 is displayed. The images P1 and P2 for both holdings can be distinguished by their color and shape from which special winning openings 52 and 253 correspond to the winning (the hatch orientation is different in the figure). That is, in the present embodiment, by displaying the first reserved image P1 in the reserved display area 42b, the player can recognize that the game times corresponding to the reserved information correspond to the ceiling. It has become. That is, the display of the first reserved image P1 corresponds to the ceiling notification effect in the present embodiment.

Further, as the holding image, a special holding image P3 (displayed with different hatch pitches in the figure) having a color and shape different from those of both holding images P1 and P2 is set, and step S2707 is set. In the hold display lottery process, which of the hold images P1 to P3 to be displayed, including the special hold image P3, is determined by lottery. In such a process, the hold display table provided in the ROM 83 is acquired, and the hold image is determined from the numerical information of the first general figure winning counter.

In the hold display table, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), when the numerical information of the first general figure winning counter is "0 to 255" that does not correspond to the ceiling, the first hold image P1 is not selected and the first hold image P1 is not selected. 1 The reserved image P1 is selected only in the case of "255" corresponding to the ceiling. Further, the closer the numerical information of the first general drawing winning counter is to "255" corresponding to the ceiling, the easier it is for the special holding image P3 to be selected. That is, the ceiling can be specified by displaying the first reserved image P1 as described above, and the ceiling is reached depending on the frequency with which the special reserved image P3 is displayed. It is possible to recognize the number of balls to some extent. Therefore, it can be said that the display of the special holding image P3 in the present embodiment corresponds to the ceiling notice notification in the first to third embodiments.

As a result, for example, when the special holding image P3 frequently appears, the motivation to continue the game can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, by setting the display trigger of the image for holding to the through gate 35A instead of the special winning openings 52 and 253, the timing of entering the special accessory 33 and the timing of winning the special winning openings 52 and 253 are set. It is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort due to misalignment.

Further, in step S2707, it is determined whether or not the variation display is performed by the symbol display device 42, and if the variation display is not performed, the above-mentioned hold display lottery process is not performed. Whether or not the fluctuation display is performed by the symbol display device 42 can be determined by checking the provisional fluctuation flag set in the RAM 84 and the special figure special electric counter when outputting the provisional fluctuation command described later. .. The tentative fluctuation command is a command that is output to the sound / light control device 300 when a prize is won in the through gate 35A in a situation where the special figure main fluctuation is not performed, and the tentative fluctuation flag is set to "1" at the time of such output. Is set. Then, the provisional fluctuation flag is erased when a prize is generated in the first special winning opening 52 or the second special winning opening 253. In step S2707, when this provisional fluctuation flag is not set and the value of the special figure special electric counter is 0 (when the special figure main fluctuation is not performed), the hold display lottery process is not performed.

After executing the process of step S2707, the hold command is set as an output target to the sound / light control device 300 in step S2708. The hold command includes information on the type of hold image determined in step S2707. Further, in step S2707, if the hold display lottery process is not performed because the through gate 35A has won a prize in the situation where the variable display by the symbol display device 42 is not performed, the hold command is not set. .. The processing on the sound and light control device 300 side when the hold command is received will be described in detail later.

If the number NS of the reserved information on the normal drawing side is not less than 4 (NS = 4) in step S2704, the process proceeds to step S2709. In step S2709, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by confirming the high frequency flag. In the high frequency support mode, in step S2710, it is determined whether or not the number PS2 of the reserved information in the second special figure holding area 204 is 4. If it is 4, the process of adding 1 to the ceiling shortening counter provided in the RAM 84 is executed in the following step S2711. The ceiling shortening counter is a counter for the MPU 82 to specify the number of times the ball has entered the special accessory 33 in a situation where the number of reserved information PS2 in the second special figure holding area 204 is 4, which is the upper limit. ..

In the following step S2712, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the ceiling shortening counter is "156". If it is "156", the limit notification command is set as an output target to the sound / light control device 300 in step S2713.

As already explained, if a ball is entered into the special bonus 33 in a situation where the number of reserved information based on the winning to the second special winning slot 253 is the upper limit (PS2 = 4), the ball is distributed in the special bonus 33. As the plate 54 is rotated, only the actual count up to the ceiling by the first general drawing winning counter progresses. By advancing only this actual count, it is possible to reach the ceiling earlier than the actual number of times the game is executed (to win a prize in the first special winning opening 52).

On the other hand, in the distribution table for the first special figure and the distribution table for the second special figure, the actual hit result is set to the low frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode in the distribution table for the second special figure. Since B is not set, in the high frequency support mode in which the number of balls held is small, the privilege obtained by the winning / failing lottery (ceiling) based on the first special winning opening 52 is given to the second special winning opening 253. It can be said that the privilege obtained by the winning / losing lottery based on the winning is preferable for the player.

Due to such playability, as a player, in the high-frequency support mode, the ceiling is received immediately after the end of the high-frequency support mode or just before the end, while receiving a pass / fail judgment based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253. It is preferable to reach (receive a winning / failing judgment based on winning the first special winning opening 52). However, as described in the first embodiment, the state of each distribution plate 54 is difficult or invisible to the player, and how many game balls should be put into the special accessory 33 afterwards. 1 It is difficult or impossible for the player to grasp whether or not it is distributed to the special winning opening 52.

The numerical information of the ceiling shortening counter determined in step S2712 is the maximum number at which only the actual count up to the ceiling can be advanced in this high frequency support mode, and only the actual count is advanced by this number or more. Means that it will reach the ceiling during high frequency support mode. The limit notification command set in step S2713 is a command for causing the sound / light control device 300 to specify such a situation. The sound / light control device 300 that has received the limit notification command controls the speaker unit 65, the display light emitting unit 63, and the like as limit notification to notify the player of such a situation. The processing on the sound light control device 300 side will be described in detail later.

That is, as described above, the player receives the pass / fail judgment based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253 as described above in the high frequency support mode by this limit notification, and after the high frequency support mode ends. It is possible to grasp the situation where it is possible to reach the ceiling immediately or just before the end.

After executing the process of step S2708 or step S2713, or when a negative determination is made in any of step S2709, step S2710 and step S2712, the process proceeds to step S2714. In step S2714, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "0", thereby determining whether or not the special figure main fluctuation is not performed. When the special figure main fluctuation is not performed, the provisional fluctuation start command is set as an output target to the sound / light control device 300 in step S2715. The provisional fluctuation start command is a command for causing the sound / light control device 300 to specify that a prize (ball entry into the special accessory 33) has occurred in the through gate 35A in a situation where the special figure main fluctuation has not been performed. Furthermore, it is a command for starting the production of the game times before winning the special winning openings 52 and 253 by using the passage of the through gate 35A as a trigger. The processing on the sound light control device 300 side will be described in detail later. Further, in step S2715, "1" is set in the temporary fluctuation flag as described above. As a result, the MPU 82 can grasp that the variation display is performed on the symbol display device 42 in the situation where the special map main variation is not performed.

When a negative determination is made in step S2714, or after the process of step S2715 is executed, it is determined in step S2716 whether or not the numerical information of the first general drawing winning counter is "256" corresponding to the ceiling. If it is not "256", the acquisition process is terminated as it is.

If the numerical information of the first general figure winning counter is "256" in step S2716, the first general figure winning counter is cleared in step S2717, and the ceiling shortening counter is cleared in step S2718. , Ends this acquisition process.

<Public map fluctuation start processing>
Next, the normal map fluctuation start processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48. The process of FIG. 48 is a process executed by replacing the process of FIG. 39.

In the present embodiment, the hit / fail determination process is performed in steps S2801 to S2810 in the same manner as in the processes of steps S2401 to S2410. In step S2811, the fluctuation display time and the stop result in the normal map display unit 39 are grasped, the grasped fluctuation display time is set in the normal figure normal electric timer counter in step S2812, and the normal figure display unit 39 is set in step S2813. Start the variable display in. Then, in step S2814, 1 is added to the normal map normal electric counter, and the normal figure fluctuation start process is terminated.

That is, in the present embodiment, the variation command and the type command for the normal map are not output to the sound / light control device 300 (step S2416), and the variation display on the symbol display device 42 side corresponding to the normal map main variation (normal map sub). Fluctuation) is not performed. Then, the variation display on the symbol display device 42 side based on the winning of the through gate 35A is only the provisional variation display is started (step S2715) in the situation where the special figure main variation is not performed.

<Acquisition process of reserved information on the special figure side>
Next, the process of acquiring the reserved information on the special drawing side in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 49. The process of FIG. 49 is a process executed in place of the process of FIG. 20.

In the present embodiment, the acquisition process on the first special drawing side is executed in steps S2901 to S2905 in the same manner as the processes of steps S901 to S905. Further, in step S2906, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second special figure winning flag, and if it is set, a process of clearing it is executed in step S2907. In the following step S2908, it is determined whether or not the number PS2 of the reserved information on the second special drawing side is less than 4, which is the upper limit number, and if it is less than 4, the holding on the second special drawing side is held in step S2909. The process of adding 1 to the number of information PS2 and updating is executed. In the following step S2910, various numerical information of various counters is stored in the corresponding areas 204a to 204d of the second special figure holding area 204. The distribution determination counter stored in step S2910 is not the support type counter C2 but the jackpot type counter C6, and this is the same in the process on the first special drawing side of step S2905. If a negative determination is made in step S2906 or step S2908, or after the process of step S2910 is executed, the acquisition process is terminated.

That is, in the present embodiment, unlike the first to third embodiments, the situation in which the processing associated with the hit / fail determination on the second special figure side is being performed (holding information is stored in the execution area 105 for the special figure). Even in the situation), the process of storing the hold information in the second special figure hold area 204 is executed. Along with this, in the data setting process (FIG. 22) in the present embodiment, the process of setting "1" in the second special figure executing flag (step S1107) and the flag in the special figure change start process (FIG. 21) are cleared. (Step S1012) is not executed (not shown). Further, as the upper limit of the number of reserved information on the second special drawing side is increased, in step S1105 of the data setting process in the present embodiment, the number PS2 of the reserved information on the second special drawing side is subtracted by 1 and updated. Change to the processing to be done.

<Special train end processing>
Next, the special electric termination processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The process of FIG. 50 is a process executed in place of the process of FIG. 24.

First, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed, as in step S1301, and if not, the special electric end processing is terminated as it is.

In the following step S3102, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is a substantially out-of-game result. Although detailed description by the figure is omitted, in the special figure variation start processing (FIG. 21) in this embodiment because the game result is changed from the first to third embodiments, the distribution determination processing (the distribution determination processing) Step S1008) The process of setting "1" to the flag corresponding to the game result distributed afterwards is executed. Specifically, if the result is a real hit, the A flag is set to "1", if the result is a real hit, the flag B is set to a real hit, and if the result is a real hit, the flag is set to "1". Set "1" to the off flag. In step S3102, by confirming this substantial deviation flag, it is possible to determine whether or not the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is the actual deviation result.

If the result is not substantially off in step S3102, it is determined in step S3103 whether or not the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is the actual hit result A. In such processing, the above-mentioned real hit flag is referred to. When the actual hit result A is obtained, the process related to the setting of the high frequency support mode is executed in steps S3104 to S3106 in the same manner as the process of steps S1303 to S1305. Further, the case where the actual hit result A is not obtained in step S3103 means that the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is the actual hit result B. In this case, the steps S3107 to S3109 are performed. The process related to the setting of the low frequency support mode is executed in the same manner as the process of steps S1306 to S1308.

If the result is substantially out of alignment in step S3102, or after executing any of the processes of step S3106 and step S3109, the process proceeds to step S3110. The processing of step S3110 and step S3111 is the same as the processing of step S1309 and step S1310. After the processing of step S3111 is performed, the special electric train termination processing is terminated.

That is, in the present embodiment, the transition of the support mode is not performed at the end of the opening / closing execution mode of the substantial deviation mode based on the substantial deviation result.

<Production determination process executed by the sound / light control device 300>
Next, the effect determination process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The process of FIG. 51 is a process executed in place of the process of FIG. 25.

First, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the hold command has been received, and if it has been received, the hold command is transmitted as it is to the display control device 400 as the hold display process in the following step S3202. Based on the reception of the hold command, the display control device 400 reads the information on the type of the hold image included in the hold command, and reads the corresponding hold images P1 to P3 from the character ROM 406 to hold the hold. A process for displaying the images P1 to P3 in the corresponding unit hold display areas 42c to 42f of the hold display area 42b of the symbol display device 42 is executed. Although detailed description by the figure is omitted, the holding image is displayed in the 4th unit hold display area 42f → 3rd unit hold display area 42e, 3rd unit hold display area 42e → 2nd unit hold at the start of the game rotation effect. The display area 42d, the second unit hold display area 42d → the first unit hold display area 42c are shifted, and the image of the first unit hold display area 42c is cleared.

If a negative determination is made in step S3201, or after the process of step S3202 is executed, it is determined in step S3203 whether or not the provisional fluctuation command has been received. When the temporary fluctuation start command is received, the temporary fluctuation start process is executed in step S3204, and then the temporary fluctuation start command is transmitted to the display control device 400 as it is in step S3205. In the temporary fluctuation start processing, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 65 are controlled so as to start the effect for the game round. Further, the display control device 400 that has received the temporary variation start command controls the symbol display device 42 so as to start the variation display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

By the way, in the effect started by receiving these provisional fluctuation commands, the effect pattern such as the presence or absence of the subsequent reach and the final stop result are not determined, and the variation display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 and it are to the last. Only the effect by the accompanying sound / light control device 300 is started. That is, the pattern of the effect for temporary fluctuation is predetermined in the sound / light control device 300 and the display control device 400. Then, the display control device 400 reads the preset data from the program ROM 403, and outputs a drawing list to the VDP 405 every time the predetermined image update timing is reached according to the data. As a result, the symbol display device 42 executes a predetermined effect for temporary fluctuation.

Specifically, the effect for this provisional variation is an effect from the start of the symbol variation display to the subsequent high-speed fluctuation of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and after each symbol row Z1 to Z3 reaches the high-speed fluctuation. Is set to maintain that state.

If a negative determination is made in step S3203, or after the process of step S3205 is executed, it is determined in step S3206 whether or not the limit notification command is received. When the limit notification command is received, the limit notification command is transmitted to the display control device 400 as it is as the limit notification process in step S3207. Based on the reception of the limit notification command, the display control device 400 reads the background data information from the character ROM 406 so as to change the background of the variable display of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 as the limit notification, and the background is the background. The symbol display device 42 is controlled so as to perform variable display using data.

When a negative determination is made in step S3206, or after the process of step S3207 is executed, it is determined in step S3208 whether or not the change command and the type command at the time of special figure change are received. When these commands are received, it is determined in the following step S3209 whether or not the provisional variation is being executed based on the processing results of steps S3103 to S3105.

If the provisional fluctuation is not executed, in step S3110, a symbol determination process for determining the stop symbol is executed based on the received variation command and type command for special symbol fluctuation, and in step S3211. Executes the effect pattern determination process. These processes are the same as the processes of step S1411 and step S1412 described above.

That is, in step S3210, the combination of the stop symbols is determined according to the game result of the game times started this time. Specifically, in the case of the real hit result A, the combination of the stop symbols is determined so that the same odd symbol combination is formed on any of the effective lines, and in the case of the real hit result B, any one of them. The combination of stop symbols is determined so that the same even-numbered symbol combination is formed on the effective line of, and in the case of a substantial deviation result, the stop symbol combination is not formed on any effective line. Determine the combination of symbols. That is, in the present embodiment, it is clarified that when the combination of the same even-numbered symbols is stopped, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode based on the substantial hit result B, and then shifts to the low frequency support mode.

Further, in step S3211, by referring to the effect table for special figure fluctuation stored in advance in the ROM 303 of the sound / light control device 300, the effect duration corresponding to the change command and the type command received this time ( Select the production duration) and select the production pattern. In the sound light control device 300, according to the effect pattern determined in step S3211, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 63 in the current game time accompanying the special figure winning is executed, and the output control of the speaker unit 65 is executed.

In the following step S3212, the stop result command corresponding to the processing result of step S3210 and the pattern command corresponding to the processing result of step S3211 are transmitted to the display control device 400. Based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the display control device 400 reads out a data table for performing the effect for the game round on the symbol display device 42 from the program ROM 403 in the display control device 400. According to the data table, a drawing list is output to VDP405 every time a predetermined image update timing is reached. As a result, in the symbol display device 42, the effect for the game round is executed according to the effect pattern determined by the sound / light control device 300, and the determined stop result is finally stopped and displayed.

If the provisional change is performed in step S3209, the replacement symbol determination process is executed in step S3213. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S3110. That is, regardless of whether or not the provisional change is executed, the final stop symbol is determined by the received change command and type command.

In the following step S3114, the process of determining the effect pattern for replacement is executed. Such processing is substantially the same as the processing in step S3111. The difference is that, of the effect patterns selected by the change command and type command and the effect table for special figure change, the effect from the start of change to the high-speed change in the change display of the symbol is deleted this time. It is decided as a production pattern for replacement of.

In the following step S3115, the replacement stop result command corresponding to the processing result of step S3113 and the pattern command corresponding to the processing result of step S3214 are transmitted to the display control device 400. The display control device 400 reads a data table for replacing the effect for provisional fluctuation from the program ROM 403 in the display control device 400 based on the received replacement stop result command and pattern command, and according to the data table. A drawing list is output to VDP405 every time a predetermined image update timing is reached. As a result, in the symbol display device 42, the effect for the game round that has already started according to the effect pattern determined by the sound / light control device 300 is replaced, and the determined stop result is finally stopped and displayed. ..

Next, the relationship between the winning of the through gate 35A (general drawing winning), the winning of each special winning opening 52, 253 (special drawing winning), and the variable display based on these winnings will be explained with reference to FIG. 52. do.

When a prize is won for the through gate 35A at the timing of t1 in which the fluctuation display is not performed in the symbol display device 42 (temporary fluctuation is not performed and the special figure special electric counter is 0). At the same time as the main fluctuation of the figure is started, the temporary fluctuation start command is output in the acquisition process of the reserved information on the normal drawing side (FIG. 46), and the temporary fluctuation (sub-variation) in the symbol display device 42 is started. When the game ball that has won the through gate 35A at the timing of t1 wins at any of the special winning openings 52 and 253 at the timing of t2, the special figure main fluctuation is started and the sound / light control device 300 temporarily changes. Is output as a replacement command (step S3215 in FIG. 51), and the provisional fluctuation started at the timing of t1 is replaced. Then, the normal map main variation ends at the timing of t3, and the variation display on the symbol display device 42 also ends at the timing when the special map main variation of t4 ends.

On the other hand, at the timing of t5, which is the situation where the fluctuation display is performed in the symbol display device 42 (provisional fluctuation is performed or the special figure special electric counter is not 0), a prize is generated for the through gate 35A. If this is the case, the main fluctuation of the normal map is started, but the temporary fluctuation command is not output. The game ball that has won the through gate 35A at the timing of t5 wins a prize at any of the special winning openings 52 and 253 at the timing of t6. When the special map main fluctuation that was being executed at the timing of t5 ends at the timing of t7, the reserved information on the special map side that has already been acquired (if the provisional fluctuation is performed at the timing of t6, the timing of t6). It is the hold information on the special figure side acquired in, and if the special figure special electric counter is not 0 at the timing of t6, the hold information on the special figure side acquired before the timing of t6) is used for t8. From the timing, the special figure main variation and the variation display on the symbol display device 42 are started. Then, these fluctuations end at the timing of t10.

Next, the flow of the game of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 53.

When the game ball wins the through gate 35A and enters the special accessory 33, the game ball is distributed to the first special winning opening 52 or the second special winning opening 253. In this case, it is normally distributed to the second special winning opening 253, and is distributed to the first special winning opening 52 only when it reaches the ceiling.

When a prize is awarded to the second special winning opening 253, the result is almost 100% jackpot, and the types of jackpot results are sorted based on the distribution table for the second special figure. In this case, there is a probability of 1/120 that the result is a real hit result A, and the rest is a real off result. When the actual hit result A is obtained, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode of the real hit mode, and the special electric prize winning device 32 is allowed to win a prize (a prize ball can be obtained). When the open / close execution mode ends, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. This high-frequency support mode continues until the number of times the game is executed reaches the specified number of times (100 times). Also, in the high frequency support mode, the number of balls held is not reduced so much because the special prize 33 is frequently entered (because the first special winning opening 52 or the second special winning opening 253 can be won to obtain a prize ball). It is possible to continue the game (expect the next open / close execution mode of the actual hit mode).

As already explained, the hold information acquired based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253 is stored only up to the maximum number of 4, but the holding information of the maximum number is stored. However, the actual count to the ceiling progresses. In the high frequency support mode, the winning frequency to the through gate 35A, that is, the frequency of entering the special accessory 33 is higher than that in the low frequency support mode, so that the above actual count can be easily advanced in the high frequency support mode. It is possible to make it. That is, it is possible to easily make a prize in the first special winning opening 52.

When it reaches the ceiling, a prize is generated in the first special winning opening 52, which also results in almost 100% jackpot. However, in the distribution table for the first special figure, 1/5 is the real hit result A and 4/5 is the real hit result B. When the actual hit result B is obtained, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode of the real hit mode, but when the open / close execution mode ends, the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode instead of the high frequency support mode.

Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, although it is possible to easily count the actual count as described above, it is actually based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253 rather than counting until it reaches the ceiling. It is preferable for the player to be distributed to the hit result A.

Therefore, as a player, in the high-frequency support mode, even in a situation where the number PS2 of the reserved information on the second special drawing side is 4, which is the upper limit value, in order to advance the actual count to the extent that the ceiling is not reached first. Win a prize in the through gate 35A (special accessory 33). Then, if the jackpot result based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253 is distributed to the actual winning result A in the distribution determination process (step S1008), the high frequency support mode continues, and the player continues to hold it. You can continue the game without reducing the number of balls. In this case, even if the actual hit result A is not distributed during the high frequency support mode, the actual count is near the ceiling at the end of the high frequency support mode, and immediately after that, the first special winning opening 52 is awarded. Based on this, it is possible to shift to the open / close execution mode of the actual hit mode.

Here, in the present embodiment, the specified number of terminations of the high-frequency support mode is set each time the opening / closing execution mode of the substantial hit mode is terminated, while the first general figure winning counter serves as the ceiling function of the special accessory 33. Since it is linked, it is configured to be set (cleared to 0) each time it reaches the ceiling.

With such a configuration, the number of prize balls that can be expected after that can be changed depending on the value of the first prize-winning counter (whether it is far or near the ceiling) at the time when the player starts hitting. can. Specifically, the closer the value of the first general drawing winning counter at the time of starting to hit is to the value corresponding to the ceiling, the sooner it is possible to win a prize in the first special winning opening 52. On the other hand, immediately after reaching the ceiling, the value of the first general drawing winning counter is the farthest from the ceiling, so from the viewpoint of obtaining the opening / closing execution mode of the actual hit mode based on the winning of the first special winning opening 52. , It seems that it is not preferable for the player. However, if the value of the 1st general drawing winning counter is small and the mode shifts to the high frequency support mode based on the winning of the 2nd special winning opening 253, it is based on the special drawing winning without reducing the number of balls held thereafter. The period for receiving the winning / failing lottery (sorting lottery) becomes longer.

Specifically, it will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b). FIG. 54 (a) shows an example of starting to hit in the situation where the value of the first general figure winning counter is "0", and FIG. 54 (b) shows an example of starting to hit in the situation of "200". Is shown.

In any situation, a winning / failing lottery (sorting lottery) is held based on the winning of the 2nd special winning opening 253. For example, if the winning result is A in the 10th winning, high frequency support is provided. At the start of the mode, if the 1st general figure winning counter starts hitting from "0", the number of balls required to reach the ceiling is "246", which is more than the specified number of times to end the high frequency support mode. On the other hand, when the first general figure winning counter starts hitting from "200", the number of balls required to reach the ceiling is "46", which is smaller than the specified number of times to end the high frequency support mode.

For example, if the number of balls required to reach the ceiling is "246", it will be distributed to the actual hit result A at the 86th prize (the first general figure prize counter is "96"), and then the 90th prize. (The first general figure winning counter is "186"), it is distributed to the real hit result A, and when it reaches the ceiling after that, the real hit result A including the first hit is 3 times and the real hit result B of the ceiling. Can be obtained once by the player. During this period, the game is played in the high-frequency support mode, so that it is possible to obtain a prize ball in the open / close execution mode of the substantial hit mode for four times without reducing the number of balls held so much.

On the other hand, for example, if the number of balls required to reach the ceiling is "46", the ceiling will be reached by the 46th winning, and any of these 46 winnings will result in a real hit result A. If it is not distributed to, the player will get one real hit result A for the first hit and one real hit result B for the ceiling.

Therefore, during the high-frequency support mode, the possibility of being distributed to the actual winning result A based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253 (the number of times the winning / failing lottery and the sorting lottery can be received) is the first common figure winning. It is easier to realize when the counter value is small and the mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, and it is preferable for the player to start hitting from the situation where the value of the first general figure winning counter is small. By doing so, even if the value of the 1st general figure winning counter is small and it is far from the ceiling, it is assumed that the player actively plays the game, and it is possible to encourage active participation in the game. Will be.

In reality, the value of the first general figure winning counter cannot be seen by the player, and as already explained, the situation of the distribution plate 54 of the special accessory 33 is difficult or impossible to see. It is difficult to know whether the game is far or near the ceiling only by the player who is actually playing the game and the person who is confirming the game in the vicinity of the player who is playing the game. However, the number of times the game is executed, not the actual count up to the ceiling, is generally displayed by a data counter or the like installed in the game hall, and even a person other than the above-mentioned person can use this data counter. It is possible to estimate the actual count up to the ceiling.

Further, in such a data counter or the like, not only the actual number of times the game is executed but also the actual count up to the ceiling may be displayed. In this case, the value of the first general drawing winning counter may be output externally from the main control device 71 or the like directly or indirectly via the hall computer or the like to the data counter or the like.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

The game ball that has passed through the through gate 35A usually wins a prize in the second special winning opening 253. Based on this prize, in the reservation process of the reserved information on the special drawing side (FIG. 49), the reserved information is acquired on condition that the number PS2 of the reserved information on the second special drawing side is less than the specified number (4). .. Then, the hit / fail determination and the distribution determination process are performed in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 21) for this hold information (step S1006 and step S1008), and when the actual hit result A is obtained, the opening / closing of the real hit mode is executed. Move to mode. In such a configuration, the game ball entered for the 256th time is distributed to the first special winning opening 52 by the ceiling function of the special accessory 33. Then, when a prize is generated in the first special winning opening 52, there is a probability of almost 100% that the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode of the substantial hit mode. As a result, even if the reserved information on the second special figure side has reached the specified number, if the through gate 35A (special accessory 33) is passed through the game ball, at least the ceiling of the special accessory 33 is reached. Since the actual count of the ceiling can be advanced, it is possible to encourage the player to continue launching the game ball.

When a prize is won in the first special winning opening 52 as described above, there is a case where the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode of the substantial hit mode with a probability of almost 100%, but does not shift with a predetermined probability. Specifically, in the hit / fail determination process, a deviation result is obtained with a probability of 1/600, and even if it is a big hit result, it shifts to an open / close execution mode of a substantial deviation mode with a probability of 1/120. This makes it possible to suppress the gambling spirit without increasing the ball ejection rate too much. In addition, in order to enhance the effect of suppressing this gambling spirit, it is advisable to increase the probability that the result will be a deviation result or a substantial deviation result. Further, as a method of suppressing gambling, the privilege obtained in the open / close execution mode of the substantial hit mode may be reduced. Specifically, the number of rounds may be reduced, the number of prize balls based on the winning of the large winning opening 32a may be reduced, or the maximum number of winning balls in one round may be reduced.

When the numerical information of the first general figure winning counter becomes a special number (156) before reaching the ceiling (256), it becomes the special number on the symbol display device 42 by the limit notification process (step S3207). It was configured to notify that. As a result, the player can grasp how soon the player will reach the ceiling, and can encourage the player to continue playing the game.

The through gate 35A is provided with a universal electric accessory 35d that can be displaced between the guided state and the non-guided state. Then, the configuration is set so as to shift to the high-frequency support mode or the low-frequency support mode when the open / close execution mode of the actual hit mode ends. Specifically, after the opening / closing execution mode based on the actual hit result A, the mode shifts to the high frequency support mode with a limited number of times, and after the opening / closing execution mode based on the substantial hit result B, the mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. Then, in the distribution table for the first special figure, there is a possibility of being distributed to either the actual hit result A or B, and in the distribution table for the second special figure, there is a possibility of being distributed only to the actual hit result A. .. In other words, there is a possibility of shifting to the low frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode that shifts due to the ceiling, and there is no possibility of shifting to the low frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode based on winning the second special winning opening 253. ..

In this case, when the player shifts to the open / close execution mode of the substantial hit mode based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253, the player does not reach the ceiling during the subsequent high frequency support mode. It is expected that the result will be distributed to the actual winning result A based on the winning of the special winning opening 253. Furthermore, even if this high-frequency support mode reaches the end specified number of times (100 times) (even if it shifts to the low-frequency support mode), high-frequency support is provided so that it reaches the ceiling as soon as possible. Adjust the number of balls entered in the mode. In addition, when it reaches the ceiling, it is expected that it will be distributed to the actual hit result A. In this way, it is possible to provide a new game by using the ceiling function of the special accessory 33 and the general electric accessory 35d provided in the through gate 35A.

The specified number of times to end the high-frequency support mode with a limited number of times is set to be less than the number of passages corresponding to the ceiling. If the specified number of terminations is larger than the number of passages corresponding to the ceiling, the high-frequency support mode is in progress even if the number of suspensions on the second special drawing side is the upper limit and the passage is not further passed to the through gate 35A. Will reach the ceiling. In this case, it is not preferable in the above-mentioned game in which the actual count is advanced to the vicinity of the ceiling and the ceiling is reached immediately after the high frequency support mode ends. Therefore, by setting the specified number of endings as described above, the above-mentioned game can be suitably realized.

If the passage to the through gate 35A occurs further when the number of reservations on the second special figure side is the upper limit, the ceiling shortening counter is added by 1, and the ceiling shortening counter becomes 156 in the high frequency support mode. In that case, the effect of the limit notification is performed by the symbol display device 42. This makes it possible for the player to know that the limit value for advancing only the actual count has been reached during the high-frequency support mode, which helps the game to end the high-frequency support mode near the ceiling. Can be done.

Generally, in a gaming machine having a ceiling function, a player selects a platform close to the ceiling to play a game, so that a platform far from the ceiling, that is, a platform immediately after the ceiling tends to be avoided. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since there is a possibility of shifting to the low frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode by the ceiling, the actual winning result is based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253 during the high frequency support mode. As for the substantial consecutive villas assigned to A, it is more likely that the substantial consecutive villas can be obtained after the transition to the high frequency support mode in the low frequency support mode far from the ceiling. As a result, it is possible to realize the relief function for the player, which is the ceiling, and to let the player play the game without being shunned even on the platform immediately after the ceiling.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied independently to the configuration of each of the above embodiments, or may be applied to the configuration of each of the above embodiments in a predetermined combination.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the state of each distribution plate 54 may be manually changed from the outside of the special accessory 33. Specifically, the special accessory 33 is configured so that the state of each distribution plate 54 can be operated from the back side of the game board 24 in a state where the front door frame 14 is rotated forward of the game ball. For example, the rotation shaft 55 of the distribution plate 54 is projected to the back side of the game board 24 to serve as an operation unit, and the operation unit of the rotation shaft 55 is manually rotated to forcibly change the state of each distribution plate 54. It can be so. Thereby, the combination of the states of the plurality of distribution plates 54 can be easily changed. Further, since the combination of the states of the plurality of distribution plates 54 can be made by rotating the front door frame 14 in front of the game ball, the hall manager can change it, but the player cannot change it. It has become. As a result, it is possible to set a morning setting that gives a privilege to the player who started the game first in the morning on the pachinko machine 10.

Further, among the plurality (8) distribution plates 54, some of the distribution plates 54 can be fixed so that the distribution destination is the first passage 51a (passage that can win a prize in the special winning opening 52). May be good. For example, when the distribution destination is fixed to the first passage side for any five distribution plates 54 out of the eight distribution plates 54 and the remaining three distribution plates 54 are not fixed, the sphere is used. When the number of passages of the game ball in the passage opening 33a becomes "8 (= 2 to the third power)", the game ball wins the special winning opening 52. In this case, the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 52 once every eight passes. In other words, the ceiling value can be changed, and the setting mode of the ceiling can be diversified.

(2) In the special accessory 33 of each of the above embodiments, an electric actuator (drive unit) such as a solenoid is provided on each of the plurality of distribution plates 54, and the distribution destination of each distribution plate 54 is switched by the actuator. May be good. In this case, it is preferable that each distribution plate 54 is configured to be driven independently. In such a configuration, for any of the distribution plates 54, the distribution destination is fixed to the first passage 51a (passage that can win the special winning opening 52) side by driving the actuator, or the second passage 51b (special winning opening 52). It can be fixed to the side of the passage that cannot win a prize, in the fourth embodiment, the passage that can win a prize in the second special winning opening 253), whereby a predetermined number (game balls can be won in the special winning opening 52). It is possible to change the number of ball passages required for the ball to either the increase side or the decrease side.

For example, when the distribution destination is fixed to the first passage side for any five distribution plates 54 out of the eight distribution plates 54 and the remaining three distribution plates 54 are not fixed, the sphere is used. When the number of passages of the game ball in the passage opening 33a becomes "8 (= 2 to the third power)", the game ball wins the special winning opening 52. In this case, the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 52 once every eight passes. In other words, the ceiling value can be changed, and the setting mode of the ceiling can be diversified.

Further, the actuator may be controlled by a control means (for example, the main control device 71). In this case, the control means determines the distribution destination of each distribution plate 54 by executing a predetermined distribution control program, and drives the actuator based on the result. As a result, the distribution destination of each distribution plate 54 can be arbitrarily switched by control, and the game content (specifications) and the game production can be diversified. For example, it is advisable to change a predetermined number (the number of passing balls required to make the game ball win the special winning opening 52) between the normal state and the high accuracy state.

Further, in the special accessory 33, the distribution plate 54 that mechanically operates with the flow of the game ball and the distribution plate 54 that is electrically driven by the electric actuator may be provided in a mixed manner. ..

(3) In each of the above embodiments, when the value of the first general figure winning counter that counts the number of game balls that have won the special accessory 33 becomes 251 and approaches "256", the symbol display device 42 is used. The configuration is such that the ceiling notice is executed, but the mode of notification is not limited to this, and each time the game round based on the Fuzu Fuden control process is executed, the value of the first Fuzu winning counter and the rest up to the ceiling. It may be configured to notify the number of times. In this case, it is preferable not to continuously notify the value of the first general figure winning counter and the number of remaining times to the ceiling even after the game round is over, but to notify only from the start to the end of the game round. .. As a result, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 just before the ceiling, the player cannot obtain the notification information unless the player plays the game, and the player can be encouraged to play the game.

(4) The fraudulent notification may be executed by using the value of the first general figure winning counter. For example, the value of the first general drawing winning counter is acquired at the time of winning the special winning opening 52, it is determined whether or not the value is "256" which is the number of ceilings, and if the counter value ≠ 256, it is determined. It is considered that a prize has been illegally generated. In this case, it is conceivable that the main control device 71 outputs an unauthorized notification command to the hall computer and the sound / light control device 300.

(5) In the first to third embodiments, the special accessory 33 is provided with a special winning opening 52 and a general winning opening 53, and the game ball that has passed through the ball passing opening 33a is the winning opening 52, 53. It was configured to be distributed to either, but this was changed, and the game ball that passed through the ball passage port 33a is either the special winning opening 52 or the out opening 24a (the entry opening that is not paid out due to the entry). It may be configured to be distributed to.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the special accessory 33 is provided with a cover member 60 that covers each distribution plate 54 from the front of the gaming machine, and the cover member 60 makes each distribution plate 54 invisible to the player. , This may be changed so that each distribution plate 54 can be visually recognized by the player. In this case, if each distribution plate 54 can be seen, the future game situation can be easily predicted, and by extension, the player's willingness to play can be further enhanced.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, in the main control device 71 (MPU82), the number of game balls that have passed through the through gate 35A provided in the left side region PE2, that is, the number of game balls that have passed through the ball passage port 33a is the first. It is configured to count by the normal figure winning counter and set the ceiling notification command when the count value reaches a predetermined value (= 251) in front of the ceiling (step S403, step S408, step S409 in FIG. 15). Then, the sound / light control device 300 is configured to receive the ceiling notification command and perform an effect corresponding to the ceiling notification. Such a configuration may be changed as follows.

For example, in the sound light control device 300 which is a sub control device, the number of game balls that have passed through the through gate 35A, that is, the number of game balls that have passed through the ball passage port 33a is counted, and the count value is a predetermined value in front of the ceiling ( = When 251) is reached, an effect corresponding to the ceiling notification is performed. In this case, the sound / light control device 300 may receive a signal indicating the passage of the ball through the through gate 35A from the main control device 71, and may count the number of times the normal drawing prize is won on the through gate 35A side accordingly. In this configuration, counting by the main control device 71 is unnecessary, and the counting process may be eliminated.

Further, in the configuration of counting the number of balls passing through the through gate 35A in the sound light control device 300 as described above, the number of passing balls of the through gate 35A on the sound light control device 300 side is the number of ceilings (= 256) for winning the jackpot. You can recognize that you have reached it. Therefore, when the number of balls passing through the through gate 35A reaches the ceiling number (= 256) of the jackpot winning, the sound / light control device 300 executes an effect corresponding to the jackpot winning as the symbol variation of the symbol display device 42. You may do it. In this case, in the sound / light control device 300, before the game ball wins the special winning opening 52 (that is, the period between the time when the game ball wins the through gate 35A and the time when the game ball wins the special winning opening 52). It is advisable to output a command to the display control device 400 to start the symbol variation corresponding to the jackpot winning (the symbol variation such that the stopped symbol becomes the jackpot symbol).

(8) While the game times based on the Fuzu Fuden control process are being executed on the symbol display device 42 (when the Fuzu Fuden counter ≠ 0), the game times based on the special figure Tokuden control process are not started. It may be configured. In this case, in the configuration in which the symbol change based on the normal map special electric control process and the symbol change based on the special figure special electric control process are performed by the same symbol display device 42, the symbol change due to the normal special electric control is halfway. It is possible to prevent it from being interrupted by.

(9) In the first to third embodiments, the game balls that have won the through gate 35A by using the special accessory 33 are configured to win the special winning opening 52 at a predetermined ratio. A game ball that has passed through the through gate 35A without using the object 33 may be configured to win a prize in the special winning opening 52 at a predetermined ratio. For example, in addition to the ball entry section (for example, the special winning opening 52) where the winning / failing lottery for the opening / closing execution mode and the effect of the game turn on the symbol display device 42 are performed on the game board 24, the passing section through which the game ball can pass (for example). A through gate 35A) is provided, and these entry portions and passage portions are arranged so that the game ball that has passed through the passage portion can enter the entry portion. Further, if the symbol display device 42 is configured to produce the game times even based on the fact that the game ball passes through the passing portion, it is possible to achieve the effect of suppressing the player from getting bored. It is possible. Even with such a configuration, since the request for the effect for playing the game to the symbol display device 42 may be duplicated, the above effect can be suitably achieved by providing a means for replacing the effect when the effect is duplicated. Will be.

That is, when there are a plurality of triggers for starting the effect of the game times as described above, the effect of the game times related to the profit for the player (the effect based on the entry into the ball entry section) is more real-time. It is necessary to inform the player of the lottery result related to the profit. Naturally, it is expected that the player will be highly interested in the production of the game times related to such profits. In this case, for example, the effect of the game times being executed (the effect based on the entry into the passing portion) is performed to the end, and then the effect of the game times (the effect based on the entry into the ball entry section) that reflects the result of the transition determination is performed. As a player, the player wants to know the result of the winning / failing lottery as soon as possible, but the production is not related to the result of the winning / failing lottery. I could hug you. Then, the staging work of the game times based on the passage of the above-mentioned passing portion prepared so that the player does not get bored may become an obstructive configuration for the player.

Therefore, in such a case, by replacing the effect of the game times being executed with the effect of the game times corresponding to the result of the winning / failing lottery, the effect of the game times can be produced without feeling the above-mentioned fatigue. The effect of the frequently performed configuration can be preferably achieved.

(10) In the first and second embodiments, when the requests for the effects for the game times overlap, the effects are replaced regardless of the remaining fluctuation display time of the game times being executed. May be changed to. That is, when the main control device 71 determines that the remaining fluctuation display time of the game times being executed is shorter than the predetermined period (predetermined time), the sound light control device 300 (or the display control device 400) performs the execution. It is also possible to start the production of the game times (special figure sub-variations) after the end of the game times in the middle (after the end of the normal figure sub-variations). In this case, for example, in a situation where all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped, it is not necessary to re-variate them, and it is possible to perform the effect of the game times corresponding to the ceiling without discomfort.

As a specific process of this configuration, in the first embodiment, in the acquisition information setting process (FIG. 23), a process of grasping the remaining variation display time on the normal drawing side is added before step S1201, and the remaining. If the fluctuation display time of is a predetermined period (for example, the period corresponding to the fact that all symbol columns Z1 to Z3 have already stopped), the fluctuation display time of the special figure main fluctuation is set to the support mode. The variable display time for the corresponding special map. Then, in this case, the sub-variation of the normal map is terminated as it is according to the variation display time set at the start. If the predetermined period is set to be long, it may be terminated immediately. In this case, a command to that effect is output to the sound / light control device 300 so as to end immediately, and the sound / light control device 300 side receives such a command so that the effect being executed is immediately terminated. It is advisable to replace the production.

Further, a command (variation command and type command) to that effect is output to the sound / light control device 300 so that the special figure sub-variation is performed following the running normal map sub-variation. Here, the fluctuation display time of the special map sub-variation is defined as the time obtained by subtracting the remaining fluctuation display time on the normal map side from the fluctuation display time of the special map main fluctuation, and the information of the fluctuation display time is the command to that effect. And output to the sound and light control device 300. By doing so, it is possible to match the end timing of the game rotation effect (special figure sub-variation) on the sound / light control device 300 side with the end timing of the variation display (special figure main variation) on the main control device 71 side. It becomes.

As a modification of the second embodiment, the acquisition process of the reserved information on the normal drawing side (FIG. 30) is changed, and the acquisition information setting process (FIG. 33) is changed.

In the process of acquiring the reserved information on the normal drawing side of this modification, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 55, the processes of steps S3201 to S3210 are executed in the same manner as in steps S1701 to S1710. Then, in step S3211, it is determined whether or not the normal figure normal electric counter is "0", and thus it is determined whether or not the effect of the game times as the normal figure sub-variation is performed. When the normal map sub-variation is performed, the normal map main variation is also performed, and in step S3212, the remaining fluctuation display time of the running normal map main variation is grasped. Then, in step S3213, based on the processing result of step S3212, it is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation display time of the running normal map main fluctuation is shorter than the predetermined period.

If the remaining fluctuation display time of the normal figure main fluctuation is longer than the predetermined period, the process of setting the ceiling replacement flag of step S3214 to "1" and the process of setting the ceiling replacement command of step S3215 as the output target are performed. conduct. If the remaining fluctuation display time of the normal map main fluctuation is shorter than the predetermined period, the processes of steps S3214 and S3215 are not performed. As a result, even if a ball entering the ceiling is generated during the execution of the sub-variation of the normal map, the sub-variation of the normal map during the execution can be terminated by the passage of the variation display time (step S1906: NO). ).

In step S3213, when the remaining fluctuation display time of the normal figure main fluctuation is shorter than the predetermined period, the process of setting "1" to the completed flag provided in the RAM 84 in step S3216 is executed. The completed flag is a flag for the MPU 82 to grasp that the sub-variation of the normal map during execution has been terminated by the lapse of the variation display time even when the ball has entered the ceiling. When an affirmative judgment is made in step S3211, or after the process of step S3215 or step S3216 is executed, the process of setting the ceiling flag to "1" is performed in step S3217, and the first general figure winning counter is performed in step S3218. After executing the process of clearing, the process of acquiring the pending information on the normal map side is terminated.

In the acquisition information setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 56, it is determined in step S3301 whether or not the high frequency flag is set to "1", and when the high frequency flag is not set to "1". In step S3302, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the completed flag. If "1" is not set in the completed flag, the process for grasping the remaining fluctuation display time of the normal map main fluctuation is performed in steps S3303 to S3306. The processing of steps S3303 to S3306 is the same as the processing of steps S2002 to S2005.

If "1" is set in the completed flag in step S3302, the process of grasping the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the support mode is executed in step S3307. Then, after grasping the special figure stop result in step S3308, the process of setting the fluctuation time grasped in step S3306 or step S3307 in the special figure special electric timer counter is executed in step S3309, and the process proceeds to step S3310.

As a result, when the remaining fluctuation display time of the normal map main fluctuation is short, the special map fluctuation time corresponding to the support mode is set.

In step S3310, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the high frequency flag, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3311. In step S3311, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the above completed flag, and if it is not set, in step S3312 and step S3313, a process of confirming the ceiling replacement flag and a process of erasing it are performed. Run. These processes are the same as the processes of steps S2010 and S2011. When a negative determination is made in step S3310, when "1" is set in the completed flag in step S3311, or after the process of step S3313 is executed, the variable command and the type command are output in step S3314. Execute the process to be set as the target. The processing of step S3315 and step S3316 is the same as the processing of step S2013 and step S2014. As a result, when the remaining fluctuation display time of the normal map main variation is short, the normal map sub-variation corresponding to the normal map main variation is terminated, and the variation command and type command for the special map sub-variation are sounded. It will be output to the control device 300 side.

The processing on the sound / light control device 300 side by receiving the variation command and the type command for the special figure sub-variation is the same as that of the first embodiment. That is, after performing the processes of steps S2101 to 2110 in the effect determination process (FIG. 34), the processes of steps S1408 to S1420 in the effect determination process (FIG. 25) of the first embodiment are performed. As a result, if the running normal map sub-variation is completed without receiving the ceiling replacement command, the game as a special map sub-variation is performed based on the received special map variation command and type command. The times are executed.

By doing so, the event of negative judgment does not occur in step S1603 in the timing-based symbol replacement process (FIG. 28) and step S2205 in the effect replacement process (FIG. 35), and the game times corresponding to the ceiling are long-term. It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue caused by the fact that the game is performed over the course of the game, and the feeling of discomfort that the game times that were once completed are replayed.

It should be noted that the above predetermined period is not limited to the period corresponding to the suspension of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and for example, the period corresponding to the suspension of the lower symbol row Z3 is at least the symbol. It is not necessary to re-variate the column Z3 to generate the reach display, and the effect of reducing the above-mentioned discomfort can be enhanced.

If the remaining fluctuation display time of the running normal map sub-variation is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 30 sec), the fluctuation display time on the special map side is set to the remaining fluctuation of the normal map sub-variation. Instead of the display time, it may be the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the support mode. Hereinafter, this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 57. The flowchart of FIG. 57 shows a process executed instead of the acquisition information setting process in the second embodiment.

That is, similarly to the processes of steps S2001 to S2004, after the processes of steps S3401 to S3404 are executed, the process of grasping the remaining fluctuation display time of the normal figure main fluctuation is executed in step S3405. In the following step S3405, it is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation display time grasped is longer than a predetermined predetermined period based on the processing result of step S3405. Then, if it is longer than the predetermined period, in step S3407, a process of grasping the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the support mode is executed. In the case of a predetermined period or less in step S3406, or after the processing of step S3407 is executed, the special figure stop result is grasped in step S3408, and the time grasped in step S3405 or step S3407 is specified in step S3409. Figure Tokuden timer Executes the process to be set in the counter. The processing of steps S3408 to S3415 is the same as the processing of steps S2009 to S2014.

As a result, when the remaining fluctuation display time of the running normal map sub-variation is longer than a predetermined predetermined period, it is set as the special map fluctuation time corresponding to the support mode. In this case, on the sound / light control device 300 side, in step S2114 of the staging determination process (FIG. 34), the game times (normal figure sub-variation) being executed so as to have the special figure variation time corresponding to the support mode. Executes the variable display time change process.

By doing so, when the remaining fluctuation display time of the running normal map sub-variation is too long, the hit / fail determination result on the special map side can be promptly notified. As a result, it is possible to quickly shift to the open / close execution mode, and it is possible to realize a smooth game.

(11) The replacement process (replacement process of the jackpot dummy) similar to the effect replacement process (FIGS. 26 and 35) by the sound / light control device 300 may be executed in addition to the game times corresponding to the ceiling. That is, even in the game times that do not correspond to the ceiling, the re-variation of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is performed with a predetermined probability. As a result, when the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are re-variated or the like, the player can be expected to correspond to the ceiling.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the special electric winning device 32 may be provided in the left side region PE2 or the lower side region PE4. By doing so, it is possible to win a prize in the through gate 35A (special accessory 33) even in the open / close execution mode, and it is possible to advance the count to the ceiling (first general figure winning counter).

(13) In the first to third embodiments, the lottery result display unit 37 (particularly, the first special figure display unit 38a) changes the end timing of the effect on the symbol display device 42 side in the game times corresponding to the ceiling. By matching the end timing of the above, the end timing of the effect on the symbol display device 42 side and the transition timing to the open / close execution mode are matched. It may be set to be slightly faster or slightly slower.

(14) In the first and second embodiments, the effect when replacing the effect on the symbol display device 42 side is not limited to the above. The point is that the effect pattern after replacement is determined based on at least the information of the effect pattern before replacement (addresses As (1) to As (x)), so that the effects before and after the replacement can be associated or replaced. It is possible to not associate the front and back effects.

(15) In the fourth embodiment, the distribution table for the second special figure referred to at the time of winning the second special winning opening 253 may also be configured to be distributed to the actual hit result B. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the gambling spirit without increasing the ball ejection rate too much.

However, in order to increase the probability that a large number of prize balls can be obtained from a substantial consecutive villa as the value of the 1st general drawing winning counter is farther from the ceiling, the second is higher than the distribution table for the 1st special drawing. It is better to set the distribution table for special figures so that the probability of being distributed to the actual hit result B is lower.

(16) In the fourth embodiment, the relationship between the distribution table for the first special drawing and the distribution table for the second special drawing may be reversed. Specifically, the distribution table for the first special figure has a higher probability of being distributed to the actual hit result A than the distribution table for the second special figure, and the distribution table for the second special figure has a higher probability. The probability of being distributed to the actual hit result B is higher than that of the distribution table for the first special figure. In this way, the probability of shifting to the high-frequency support mode is low based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253, and the transition to the high-frequency support mode is performed based on the winning of the first special winning opening 52. The probability is high. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, how the distribution determination based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253 cannot be distributed to the actual hit result B, that is, how to reach the ceiling early is the high-frequency support mode. It becomes the liver to continue. Therefore, in order to advance only the actual count to the ceiling, it is considered that the player will further win the through gate 35A (special accessory 33) in the situation where the number of reservations on the second special figure side is the upper limit. It is possible to encourage continuous firing of the game ball in such a situation.

(17) In the fourth embodiment, a high-frequency support mode with no limit on the number of times may be provided. Even in this case, in order to achieve the effect of not increasing the ball ejection rate too much, it is practically possible to shift to the low frequency support mode at least after reaching the ceiling, that is, in the distribution table for the first special figure. If the configuration is distributed to the hit result B, the continuation of the high frequency support mode can be substantially suppressed by the number of passes through the through gate 35A instead of the number of game rounds. However, in order to realize the game playability of adjusting the launch operation of the game ball in relation to the specified number of terminations and the ceiling as shown in the fourth embodiment, a high frequency support mode with a limited number of times is set. Must have been.

(18) In the fourth embodiment, the ceiling function of the special accessory 33 is used to make it more meaningful to win a prize in the situation where the number of reserved figures on the second special figure side is the upper limit. May be configured to be realized by internal control of the gaming machine or the like. That is, for example, a starting ball entry section is provided in the game area PE, and based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry section, special information such as a jackpot random number counter C1 is acquired up to a specified number, and the special information is obtained. In a configuration in which a privilege is given to a player by an open / close execution mode or the like when the information corresponds to a big hit winning, when the number of balls entered into the starting ball entry portion reaches the number corresponding to the ceiling. If the structure is such that the player is given a privilege regardless of the special information, it is possible to give the player a meaning to enter the starting ball entry section even if the number of special information is a specified number. ..

(19) In the first to third embodiments, the number of passages to the through gate 35A and the number of game times to be executed up to the ceiling may be combined. As a configuration for this combination, for example, a configuration in which a holding area that can store hold information for a normal map is provided more than the number of ceilings, or a lid or the like is possible so as not to win a prize in the through gate 35A while the normal map sub-variation is being executed. A configuration in which animals are provided is conceivable.

(20) In the first embodiment described above, the variation display time of the game times (normal map sub-variation) being executed is extended or shortened according to the variation display time of the special map main variation, but it is being executed. The variable display time of the game times may be configured not to be extended or shortened. If the configuration is such that the fluctuation display time of the running game times is not extended, the running game times end according to the jackpot result before the special figure main fluctuation ends, and the fluctuation display of the running game times is displayed. If the configuration is such that the time is not shortened, the game times being executed will end according to the jackpot result after the special figure main fluctuation is completed. Therefore, the end timing of the variation display between the special figure display unit 38 and the symbol display device 42 will be different. However, in relation to the open / close execution mode, for example, in the open / close execution mode, after shifting to the open / close execution mode, By adjusting the opening period until the opening / closing control of the special electric winning device 32 is started, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player. In this case, if the sub-variation ends before the special figure main change, the above opening period is continued until the special figure main change ends, and if the sub-variation ends after the special figure main change, the sub-variation continues. It is advisable to continue the above opening period until the fluctuation is completed.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to switch the launch mode of the launch operation device 28 when shifting to the open / close execution mode at the ceiling (winning to the special winning opening 52) as described above. Therefore, the sound / light control device 300 performs an effect of instructing the player to perform such a switch (for example, display on the display screen 42a that the player should hit right) in the opening effect. Therefore, even if the opening period is extended as described above, the player feels annoyed that the period from the notification of the jackpot result to the start of the opening / closing control of the special electric winning device 32 becomes long. It can be suppressed.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, the sound / light control device 300 may be configured to be able to grasp the number of times to the ceiling. In this configuration, every time the first normal figure winning counter is updated in the main control device 71, and when the power is turned on, a command for grasping the numerical value of the first normal figure winning counter is issued from the main control device 71. It may be configured to output to the control device 300.

In the pachinko machine 10, the numerical value (number of times to the ceiling) of the first general drawing winning counter of the RAM 84 of the main control device 71 is stored and retained even when the power is turned off by the power supply and the backup power supply from the launch control device 78. .. On the other hand, in the sound / light control device 300, the number of times up to the ceiling is not stored and retained when the power is turned off. Therefore, for example, when the sound / light control device 300 notifies the number of times to the ceiling or changes the effect content (for example, the background image of the display screen 42a) depending on the number of stays, the sound / light control is performed when the power is turned on. The device 300 needs to know the number of times to the ceiling. Therefore, the significance of the above configuration arises.

(22) In the special accessory 33, a passing portion through which the game ball can enter is provided in addition to the ball passing port 33a, and the gaming ball passing through the passing portion is led out in the middle of the first passage 51a. good. In this case, since the distribution plate 54 is operated by the game ball that has passed through the passing portion, the number of times to the ceiling is switched in the middle, and the game can be diversified.

Further, for example, assuming that the game ball rolling on the stage provided below the display screen 42a is led out to the passing portion by a warp passage or the like, the player who is visually recognizing the display screen 42a will find this. Since the rolling game ball is also in sight, in addition to the game of checking the effect content of the display screen 42a, a new game of checking the movement of the game ball rolling on this stage has been added to improve the interest. It is more preferable from the viewpoint of.

(23) In the second and third embodiments described above, the special map is at the timing when the variation on the normal map side ends according to the remaining variation display time on the normal map side during the execution of the variation display time on the special map side. The configuration is such that the fluctuation on the side is also decided to end, but from the viewpoint of directing by associating the fluctuation on the normal map side with the fluctuation on the special map side, the fluctuation display time on the special map side is set on the normal map side. Any configuration may be used as long as it is determined according to the operating conditions.

For example, in the acquisition information setting process (FIGS. 33 and 40) in the main control device 71, the remaining variation display time of the normal diagram main variation is grasped (step S2005, step S2504, step S2506), and the special figure special electric timer counter In the setting process to (step S2008, step S2510), the time may be set to be longer than the grasped time, or may be set to be shorter. If the setting is set for a long time, after the variation display of the symbol is completed in the symbol display device 42, the variation display in the special symbol display unit 38 is terminated. Therefore, as a player, the symbol display device 42 is more than the special symbol display unit 38. The result of the hit / miss determination on the special figure side can be grasped, and as a result, the degree of attention to the symbol display device 42 is increased. On the other hand, if the setting is set short, the variation display on the special symbol display unit 38 ends before the variation display of the symbol ends on the symbol display device 42. The open / close control of 32 can be started. Therefore, it is possible to realize an unexpected effect that the winning result is notified by another accessory (special electric winning device 32) before the notification on the symbol display device 42 side. In this configuration, in order to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention on the symbol display device 42 side, for example, it is preferable to set it shorter than the remaining fluctuation display time of the normal map main fluctuation with a predetermined probability.

Further, in the configuration in which a plurality of reserved information on the normal map side can be stored as in the third embodiment, the variable display time on the special map side is determined by the number of reserved information on the normal map side stored at the time of winning the special figure. It may be a configuration to be determined. In this case, the fluctuation display time table on the special figure side according to the number of reserved information is stored in ROM 83 in advance, and the number of reserved information on the normal drawing side and the fluctuation are stored in the acquisition information setting process in the main control device 71. It is advisable to refer to the display time table to determine the variable display time on the special map side. When this configuration is adopted in the third embodiment, the fluctuation display time on the normal drawing side is set as a fixed period regardless of the numerical value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2. Then, the process of step S2507 in the acquisition information setting process (FIG. 40) of the main control device 71 is performed on the ceiling by using the number of reserved information up to the area where the ceiling information is confirmed in step S2505 and the variable display time table. Change to the process of grasping the fluctuation display time of the hold information including the hold information corresponding to the information. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load as compared with the configuration in which the fluctuation display time of the pending information is grasped.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

In addition, the following feature A group is "as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the ball entry portion provided in the game area, and a pattern is displayed on the display screen of the display device. It is known that when a winning result is obtained in the lottery, the combination of specific symbols is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the game shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-074175). In such a gaming machine, if the period during which the ball does not enter the ball entry portion continues for a long period of time, the special gaming state is entered during that period. Not only is the transition lottery not performed, but the variable display is not performed on the display screen, which may reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, there is still room for improvement in increasing the attention to the game. " It was made in consideration of the technical background and issues.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball into the game area (game area PE), and
A first ball entry section (special winning opening 52) provided in the game area where a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
A transition determination means (special by the main control device 71) that executes a transition determination as to whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry unit. Function to execute the hit / fail judgment process on the figure side) and
When the determination result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition correspondence result corresponding to the transition to the special state, the special state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the special state (special by the main control device 71). Function to execute the process during figure confirmation) and
A display means (design display device 42) that executes a predetermined display effect, and
Based on the fact that the transition determination is made by the transition determination means, the display means starts the game rotation operation, sets the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination, and ends the game rotation operation. The first game round execution means (a function of executing the effect determination process by the sound / light control device 300) and
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the game area, a second ball entry section (through gate 35A) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter is provided in addition to the first entry section.
The transition determination means does not perform the transition determination based on the entry of the ball into the second entry portion.
Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry portion, the display means starts the game rotation operation, makes a predetermined stop result, and ends the game rotation operation. Means and
Based on the fact that the transition determination is made by the transition determination means during the execution of the game rotation operation by the second game rotation execution means, the game rotation operation corresponds to the determination result of the transition determination. A game rotation replacement means (a function of executing an effect replacement process by the sound / light control device 300) that replaces the game rotation operation being executed so as to be a game rotation operation.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature A1, the transition determination is performed based on the gaming ball entering the first ball entry portion, and the game rotation operation is performed in the display means, and the determination result of the transition determination is the transition correspondence result. In a gaming machine that shifts to a special state that is advantageous to the player in a certain case, the gaming rotation operation is also performed based on the entry into the second entry section. That is, since the game rotation operation is performed based not only on the first ball entry unit but also on the second ball entry unit, it is compared with the configuration in which the game rotation operation is performed based only on the first ball entry unit. The game rotation operation is frequently performed. With such a configuration, even if the period in which the ball does not enter the first ball entry section continues for a long time, the display means can play the game based on the ball entry into the second ball entry section. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored because the operation is performed.

However, in such a configuration, if a ball is entered into the first ball entry portion during the game rounding operation based on the entry into the second ball entry section, the game rounding operation is requested. Will be duplicated. That is, the game rotation operation is performed so as to obtain a predetermined stop result based on the entry into the second entry section, and under this situation, the determination of the transition determination based on the entry into the first entry section is made. Requests for game rounding operations that result in a stop result corresponding to the result are duplicated.

And since the game rotation operation based on the entry into the first ball entry section reflects the result of the transition determination and is related to the interest of the player, the determination result regarding the benefit (transition correspondence result). ) Occurs, it is necessary to inform the player of the determination result without causing a delay in the return of the profit. In other words, although the gaming machine is already in a state of returning profits (it is in the stage before shifting to a special state), there are endless movements unrelated to the gaming rotation operation. Is not desirable. This is because if you do not notify the special state even though you have moved to the special state, only the player who can know that you have moved to the special state can benefit from the special state, so the fairness of the game. This is because it becomes difficult to secure.

Therefore, in this game machine, in such a case, by replacing the running game rotation operation with the game rotation operation corresponding to the result of the transition determination, the above-mentioned inconvenience is solved and the game rotation operation is performed. The effect of the frequently performed configuration can be preferably achieved.

Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature A2. A notification means (lottery result display unit 37) that is provided separately from the display means and executes a predetermined notification, and
Based on the fact that the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means, the notification means starts the variation display, sets the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination, and stops the variation display (variation display means). Function to execute special figure special electric control processing by the main control device 71) and
Equipped with
When the determination result of the transition determination is the transition correspondence result, the special state transition means changes the gaming state to the special state after the variation display in the notification means by the variation display means is stopped or at the same time as the stop. To move to
When the game rotation operation is replaced by the game rotation replacement means, the game rotation operation after the replacement is terminated at the timing when the variation display by the variation display means is stopped. Setting means (in the first embodiment, it is a function of executing the effect replacement process by the sound / light control device 300, and in the second and third embodiments, steps S2005 to S2008 and steps S2504 by the main control device 71. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the gaming machine is provided with (a function of executing the processes of step S2509 and step S2510).

According to the above configuration, the determination result of the transition determination means is notified by the notification means separately from the display means. Then, when the determination result is a transition correspondence result, the gaming state shifts to the special state after the variation display of the notification means is stopped or at the same time as the stop. In this case, the game rotation operation on the display means side can be replaced by the game rotation replacement means, but the variable display on the notification means side cannot be replaced. Therefore, when the result of the transition determination accompanying the entry into the first ball entry portion is displayed on the display means and the notification means, respectively, if the stop timing of each of the displays is shifted, the effect is continued. However, it may be in a special state, and it is considered that inconveniences such as a player feeling uncomfortable when looking at each of these displays may occur.

That is, for example, if the timing of the display stop of the display means is too early with respect to the timing of the notification stop of the notification means, there is a possibility that the player who is watching not only the display means but also the notification means may be frustrated that the display is not made. .. On the contrary, if the timing of the notification stop of the notification means is too early for the timing of the display stop of the display means, the result of the transition determination is known before the display stop of the display means, and the display stop of the display means is waited for. There is a risk of distraction.

Therefore, according to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention without causing such an inconvenience.

Feature A3. The setting means shortens or shortens the remaining operation period of the game rotation operation by the second game rotation execution means being executed, depending on the period from the start to the stop of the variation display in the notification means. The gaming machine according to feature A2, which comprises means for extending (a function of executing the processes of steps S1501 to S1504 and step S1506 by the sound / light control device 300).

According to the above configuration, when the game rotation operation is replaced by the game rotation replacement means, the effect of the feature A2 can be exhibited without changing the period of the variation display on the notification means side.

In particular, with such a configuration, it is possible to set in advance the period from the start to the stop of the variable display in the notification means regardless of the replacement by the game round replacement means, and the replacement is frequent. Since this preset period can be used in the game rounding operation that is not performed in the above, the progress of the game can be smoothed.

Feature A4. The setting means sets the period from the start to the stop of the variation display in the notification means to be the remaining operation period of the game rotation operation by the second game rotation execution means being executed. The gaming machine according to feature A2, which comprises means for performing (a function of executing the processes of steps S2005, S2008 and S2012 by the main control device 71).

According to the above configuration, when the game rotation operation by the game rotation replacement means is replaced, the effect of the feature A2 can be obtained without changing the operation period of the game rotation operation on the display means side.

In particular, with such a configuration, since the operation period on the display means side does not change, it is possible to suppress that one game rotation operation is extremely prolonged at the time of replacement, and to reduce the discomfort given to the player. Can be done.

Feature A5. The second ball entry portion is configured so that the game ball can pass through in the game area.
The first ball entry section is provided at a position where the game ball can enter the ball by passing the game ball through the second ball entry section.
In the game rotation operation by the second game rotation execution means, the operation period is longer than the period required for the game ball that has passed through the second entry portion to enter the first entry portion. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A4, which comprises the above-mentioned feature A1 to A4.

According to the above configuration, when the game ball enters the first entry section, the game ball may have passed through the second entry section at a timing earlier than that. .. The motion for game rotation by the second game rotation execution means includes a motion period longer than the period required for the game ball that has passed through the second entry section to enter the first entry section. Therefore, when the game ball that has passed through the second entry section enters the first entry section as described above, the game turning operation based on the passage of the second entry section is not completed. Sometimes. In such a case, the requests for the game rotation operation are duplicated as described above, but since the game rotation operation is replaced as shown in the feature A1, the effect shown in the feature A1 is obtained. Can be done.

Feature A6. A game ball provided in a ball passing region where a game ball can pass from the second ball entry section to the first ball entry section, and the game ball that has passed through the second ball entry section is transferred to the first ball entry section. The description according to feature A5, wherein the feature A5 is provided with a distribution means (distribution plate 54) for distributing the ball to either the first passage for entering the ball and the second passage for preventing the ball from entering the first ball entry portion. A game machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to change whether or not the game ball that has passed through the second entry section is allowed to enter the first entry section by the sorting means. Therefore, it is possible to enter the first ball entry section by passing through the second entry section, but even if the ball passes through the second entry section, all the balls enter the first entry section. However, it is possible to cause a case where the replacement of the game rotation operation by the game rotation replacement means can be performed and a case where the replacement cannot be performed. This makes it possible to diversify the production.

Feature A7. The distribution means is characterized in that as a predetermined number of gaming balls pass through the second entry portion, the game shifts to a state in which the game balls enter the first entry portion. The gaming machine described in A6.

According to the above configuration, the distribution means shifts to a state in which a predetermined number of game balls pass through the second entry portion and the game balls are entered into the first entry portion. That is, in order for a game ball to enter the first entry section and receive a transition determination, it is one condition that a predetermined number of game balls are passed through the second entry section. In this case, it is considered that the player who plays the game machine positively continues the game with the expectation that some privilege will be obtained by passing a predetermined number of game balls in the second ball entry section. This makes it possible to encourage the player to continue playing. In addition, it is possible to improve the interest in the game and, by extension, increase the player's motivation to play.

Feature A8. A grasping means (for example, a main control device 71) for grasping whether the distribution means distributes the game ball to the first passage or the second passage when the game ball passes through the second entry portion. (Function to execute the process of step S1710) and
When the grasping means grasps that the game ball that has passed through the second entry portion is distributed to the first passage, the second game before the start of the game rotation operation by the first game rotation execution means. A feature A6 or a feature A6 characterized by comprising an end limiting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1712 and S1906 by the main control device 71) for limiting the end of the game round operation by the game round execution means. Feature The gaming machine described in A7.

According to the above configuration, when the ball enters the first ball entry portion, the end of the game rotation operation by the second game rotation execution means is restricted. As a result, there is no event that the running game rotation operation is terminated before the game rotation replacement means replaces the game rotation operation.

That is, when it is grasped that the game ball that has passed through the second entry portion is distributed to the first passage, the game rotation operation by the second game rotation execution means is started at that time (during execution). If there is), even if the game ball enters the first ball entry section after that, the second game turn operation is performed without executing the game turn operation corresponding to the entry into the first entry section. There is a risk that it will end. On the other hand, according to the above configuration, in such a case, since the end of the game rounding operation by the second game round execution means being executed is restricted by the end limiting means, the game round replacement means is a game. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the target game diversion motion does not exist even though the diversion motion is tried to be replaced.

Feature A9. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry portion, an advantageous determination as to whether or not to shift the gaming state to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and more disadvantageous than the special state is executed. Advantageous determination means (a function of executing the hit / fail determination process on the normal drawing side by the main control device 71) and
When the determination result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is the advantageous response result corresponding to the transition to the advantageous state, the advantageous transition means for shifting the gaming state to the advantageous state (general diagram by the main control device 71). Function to execute processing during confirmation) and
Equipped with
The second game round execution means starts the game rounding operation in the display means based on the advantage determination made by the advantage determination means, and makes a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the advantage determination. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, characterized in that the gaming rotation operation is terminated.

According to the above configuration, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry portion, the transition determination is not performed, but at least the advantageous determination is performed, so that the game rotation operation without the transition determination is performed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention in the case. However, since the special state is more advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, it is assumed that the player is more interested in whether or not to shift to the special state than the advantageous state. As described above, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention to the game rotation operation without the transition determination, while retaining the significance of replacing the game rotation operation.

Feature A10. When the determination result of the advantage determination that triggered the game rotation operation in the game rotation operation by the second game rotation execution means is the advantageous response result, the game rotation replacement means is described. The gaming machine according to feature A9, which comprises a replacement limiting means (for example, a function of executing the process of step S1414 by the sound / light control device 300) that does not replace the game rotation operation during execution.

According to the above configuration, when the determination result of the advantage determination based on the entry into the second ball entry portion is the advantage correspondence result, it overlaps with the request for the game rounding operation due to the transition determination. Even in some cases, the advantage judgment has priority. By doing so, it is possible to make the game rotation operation based on the entry into the second entry portion more effective.

Feature A11. It is provided with an operation mode determining means (for example, a function of executing the processing of step S1404 and step S1414 by the sound light control device 300) for determining the operation mode (effect pattern) when the game rotation operation is performed.
The operation mode determining means is based on the operation mode of the game rotation operation by the second game rotation execution means being executed when the game rotation operation is replaced by the game rotation replacement means. Features A1 to feature A1 to be characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function of executing an effect replacement process by the sound / light control device 300) for determining an operation mode of the game rotation operation by the first game rotation execution means after replacement. The gaming machine according to any one of A10.

According to the above configuration, the operation mode of the game rotation operation by the second game rotation execution means being executed and the operation mode after the replacement are executed as a series of operations with a predetermined relationship (regularity). It is possible, and unlike the case where the replacement is performed without such a relationship, the player can be greatly interested (in other words, a sense of expectation) about what is replaced with what.

Feature A12. In the operation mode determining means, when the game rotation operation is replaced by at least the game rotation replacement means, the operation mode of the game rotation operation by the first game rotation execution means after the replacement is determined. The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein the operation mode is determined so as to be a continuous operation mode from the operation mode of the game rotation operation by the second game rotation execution means being executed.

According to the above configuration, when the game rotation operation is replaced, the operation mode that has been performed up to that point is replaced with a continuous operation mode. Therefore, the game rotation operation that has been performed up to that point is not wasted, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player feels that the previous effect is empty. Further, by doing so, it is possible to reduce the feeling of strangeness when the replacement is performed.

It should be noted that "the operation mode of the game rotation operation by the first game rotation execution means after replacement is a continuous operation mode from the operation mode of the game rotation operation by the second game rotation execution means being executed". Includes, for example, the continuation of the production with the same character in the same appearance, or the continuation of the production of the same story tailoring.

Feature A13. In the operation mode determining means, at least when the game rotation operation is replaced by the game rotation replacement means, the operation mode of the game rotation operation by the first game rotation execution means after the replacement is executed. The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein the operation mode is determined so as to be a non-continuous operation mode from the operation mode of the game rotation operation by the second game rotation execution means.

According to the above configuration, when the game rotation operation is replaced, the operation mode that has been performed up to that point is replaced with a non-continuous operation mode. Therefore, the player can easily notice that the game rotation operation has been replaced, recognizes that the transition determination has been made, and expects that the determination result is the transition correspondence result. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the effect that can be replaced with the discontinuous operation mode in this way.

In addition, what is "an operation mode in which the operation mode of the game rotation operation by the first game rotation execution means after replacement is not continuous from the operation mode of the game rotation operation by the second game rotation execution means being executed"? , The characters appearing in the production are changed, the format is changed, and different story-style productions are performed.

Feature A14. In the game rotation operation, the display means starts variable display of a plurality of symbols, and the variable display of the plurality of symbols is set as a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination or a predetermined stop result. Further, when the determination result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition correspondence result, the combination of reach symbols that may establish a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed. By making it reach, the reach state is set, the reach variation (reach display) is performed in the reach state, and then the combination of the predetermined patterns is used to end the reach variation.
A determination means for determining whether or not the variation display of each of the above patterns is performed is provided.
When the transition determination means is performed by the transition determination means during the execution of the game rotation operation by the second game execution means, the game rotation replacement means has all the symbols of each of the above-mentioned symbols by the determination means. When it is determined that the variation display (high-speed variation) is performed, the stop symbol of each of the symbols in the variation display is replaced so that the reach variation is performed, and any of the symbols is used by the determination means. If it is determined that the fluctuation display of the above has ended or the preparatory movement before the stop (low-speed fluctuation) has been performed, the pattern whose fluctuation display has ended or has shifted to the preparatory movement is displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, wherein the variation is displayed again, and the stop pattern of the pattern is replaced so that the reach variation is performed.

According to the above configuration, when the game rotation operation is replaced, the reach variation can be performed even if the game rotation operation being executed is not scheduled to perform the reach variation. That is, when the determination result of the transition determination is the transition correspondence result, the reach variation ends as a combination of predetermined symbols, and it is desirable that each symbol is in the reach state as a premise. Then, if the game rotation operation being executed is not scheduled to change the reach, there is a possibility that each pattern is stopped without being in the reach state. Therefore, it is determined by the determination means whether or not the variable display of each pattern is performed, and if all the patterns are in the variable display, the stop pattern itself of those patterns is replaced, and then the reach is changed as the reach state. If any of the symbols is stopped or has shifted to the preparatory operation before the stop, it will be displayed in a variable manner again, and the stopped symbol will be replaced to bring it into the reach state. , It is possible to avoid the inconvenience when the reach state is not reached as described above. Furthermore, when the stop pattern is replaced in this way, the previous production is not wasted when replacing the game rotation operation, and the player is less likely to feel that the previous production is empty. can do. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of strangeness when the product is replaced.

<Characteristic B group>
In addition, the following feature B group is "as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the ball entry portion provided in the game area, and a pattern is displayed on the display screen of the display device. It is known that when a winning result is obtained in the lottery, the combination of specific symbols is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the game shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-074175). If the period in which the ball does not enter the ball entry section continues for a long period of time, the lottery for transition to the special gaming state is not performed during that period. There is still room for improvement in terms of increasing the degree of attention to the game, because the variable display is not performed on the display screen and the interest in the game may decrease. " It was done.

Feature B1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball into the game area (game area PE), and
A first ball entry section (special winning opening 52) provided in the game area where a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
A transition determination means (special by the main control device 71) that executes a transition determination as to whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry unit. Function to execute the hit / fail judgment process on the figure side) and
When the determination result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition correspondence result corresponding to the transition to the special state, the special state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the special state (special by the main control device 71). Function to execute the process during figure confirmation) and
A display means (design display device 42) that executes a predetermined display effect, and
Based on the fact that the transition determination is made by the transition determination means, the display means starts the game rotation operation, sets the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination, and ends the game rotation operation. The first game round execution means (a function of executing the effect determination process by the sound / light control device 300) and
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the game area, a second ball entry section (through gate 35A) is provided in addition to the first entry section, in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered.
Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry portion, the display means starts the game rotation operation, makes a predetermined stop result, and ends the game rotation operation. Equipped with means
The first ball entry section is provided at a position where the game ball can enter the game ball when the game ball enters the second ball entry section.
A grasping means for grasping whether or not a game ball that has entered the second entry section subsequently enters the first entry section (step by the main control device 71 in the second and third embodiments). Functions for executing the processes of S1710 to step S1714 and steps S2311 to S2314) and
Based on the fact that when the game ball that has entered the second entry unit is grasped by the grasping means, the game rotation operation by the second game rotation execution means is performed. A game destination execution means (step S1812 or step S2413 by the main control device 71 in the second and third embodiments) for executing a process of starting as the game rotation operation corresponding to the ball entering the first ball entry unit. Function to execute the processing of) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature B1, the transition determination is performed based on the gaming ball entering the first ball entry portion, and the game rotation operation is performed in the display means, and the determination result of the transition determination is the transition correspondence result. In a gaming machine that shifts to a special state that is advantageous to the player in a certain case, the gaming rotation operation is also performed based on the entry into the second entry section. That is, since the game rotation operation is performed based not only on the first ball entry unit but also on the second ball entry unit, it is compared with the configuration in which the game rotation operation is performed based only on the first ball entry unit. The game rotation operation is frequently performed. With such a configuration, even if the period in which the ball does not enter the first ball entry section continues for a long time, the display means can play the game based on the ball entry into the second ball entry section. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored because the operation is performed.

However, the first ball entry section is provided at a position where the game ball that has entered the second ball entry section can enter, and in such a configuration, the game based on the entry into the second ball entry section. If a ball enters the first ball entry portion during the rotation operation, the requests for the game rotation operation are duplicated. That is, the game rotation operation is performed so as to obtain a predetermined stop result based on the entry into the second entry section, and under this situation, the determination of the transition determination based on the entry into the first entry section is made. Requests for game rounding operations that result in a stop result corresponding to the result are duplicated.

And since the game rotation operation based on the entry into the first ball entry section reflects the result of the transition determination and is related to the interest of the player, the determination result regarding the benefit (transition correspondence result). ) Occurs, it is necessary to inform the player of the determination result without causing a delay in the return of the profit. In other words, even though the gaming machine is already in a state of returning profits (it is in the stage before shifting to a special state), there are endless movements unrelated to it as a gaming rotation operation. Is not desirable. This is because if you do not notify the special state even though you have moved to the special state, only the player who can know that you have moved to the special state can benefit from the special state, so the fairness of the game. This is because it becomes difficult to secure.

Therefore, in this gaming machine, in such a case, when the grasping means grasps that the gaming ball that has entered the second entry section enters the first entry section, the second gaming execution means. The game-turning operation is started in advance as a game-turning operation corresponding to the entry into the first entry section (when the ball enters the second entry section and before the entry of the first entry section). It is configured to be. Therefore, the above-mentioned inconvenience does not occur, and the effect of the configuration in which the game rotation operation is frequently performed can be suitably achieved.

Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature B2. A notification means (lottery result display unit 37) that is provided separately from the display means and executes a predetermined notification, and
Based on the fact that the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means, the notification means starts the variation display, sets the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination, and stops the variation display (variation display means). Function to execute special figure special electric control processing by the main control device 71) and
Equipped with
When the determination result of the transition determination is the transition correspondence result, the special state transition means changes the gaming state to the special state after the variation display in the notification means by the variation display means is stopped or at the same time as the stop. To move to
When the game rotation operation is started by the game destination execution means, the setting means for setting the variation display by the variation display means to stop at the timing at which the started game rotation operation ends. 2. The feature B1 is characterized by comprising (a function of executing the processes of steps S2005 to S2008, steps S2504, steps S2509, and step S2510 by the main control device 71 in the second and third embodiments). Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the determination result of the transition determination means is notified by the notification means separately from the display means. Then, when the determination result is a transition correspondence result, the gaming state shifts to the special state after the variation display of the notification means is stopped or at the same time as the stop. In this case, the game rotation operation on the display means side may be started by the game rotation destination execution means at the timing before the transition determination, but the variation display on the notification means side is started based on the transition determination. To. Therefore, when the result of the transition determination accompanying the entry into the first ball entry portion is displayed on the display means and the notification means, respectively, if the stop timing of each of the displays is shifted, the effect is continued. However, it may be in a special state, and it is considered that inconveniences such as a player feeling uncomfortable when looking at each of these displays may occur.

That is, for example, if the timing of the display stop of the display means is too early with respect to the timing of the notification stop of the notification means, there is a possibility that the player who is watching not only the display means but also the notification means may be frustrated that the display is not made. .. On the contrary, if the timing of the notification stop of the notification means is too early for the timing of the display stop of the display means, the result of the transition determination is known before the display stop of the display means, and the display stop of the display means is waited for. There is a risk of distraction.

Therefore, according to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention without causing such an inconvenience.

Feature B3. The setting means sets the period from the start to the stop of the variation display in the notification means as the remaining operation period of the game rotation operation by the second game rotation execution means at the start time of the variation display. The gaming machine according to feature B2, characterized in that it is provided with means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2005, S2008 and S2012 by the main control device 71).

According to the above configuration, the effect of feature B2 can be achieved without changing the period of variable display on the display means side.

In particular, with such a configuration, one game rotation operation is extremely prolonged in order to match the end timing of the game rotation operation on the display means side with the end timing of the variation display on the notification means side. It is possible to suppress the feeling of discomfort given to the player.

Feature B4. The game turn execution means is the game by the second game turn execution means when the game ball that has entered the second entry section is grasped by the grasping means when the game ball enters the first entry section. When the turning operation is performed, the game turning operation by the second game turning execution means is changed to the gaming turning operation corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination without starting the game turning operation. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, which comprises means for replacement (a function of executing the process of step S1713 by the main control device 71 and step S2110 by the sound light control device 300).

According to the above configuration, when it is grasped by the grasping means that the ball will enter the first ball entry portion, if the game turning operation by the second game round executing means is performed, the game turning destination executing means is performed. The game rounding operation cannot be started. Therefore, the game rotation operation by the second game rotation execution means is replaced so as to correspond to the result of the transition determination. By doing so, when the game balls continuously enter the second entry section and the subsequent game balls enter the first entry section, the result of the transition determination is first. It is possible to notify the player without waiting for the end of the game rotation operation (the game rotation operation by the second game rotation execution means) triggered by the entry into the second ball entry unit.

Feature B5. When the game ball that has entered the second ball entry portion is grasped by the grasping means when the game ball that has entered the second ball entry portion is grasped by the grasping means, the game turn execution means is the game by the second game turn execution means. End limiting means for limiting the end of the game rotation operation by the second game rotation execution means before the start of the game rotation operation by the first game rotation execution means when the rotation operation is performed ( The gaming machine according to feature B4, which comprises a function of executing the processes of steps S1712 and S1906 by the main control device 71).

According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine of the feature B4, when the ball enters the first ball entry portion, the end of the gaming rotation operation by the second gaming rotation executing means is restricted. As a result, there is no event that the running game rotation operation is terminated before the stop result of the game rotation operation is replaced as the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination.

That is, when it is grasped that the game ball that has entered the second entry section enters the first entry section, the second game turn execution means is performing the game turn operation at that time. The game rotation operation cannot be started by the game rotation destination execution means. In this case, even if the game ball enters the first ball entry portion after that, there is a possibility that the second game rotation operation will end. On the other hand, according to the above configuration, in such a case, since the end of the game rounding operation by the second game round execution means being executed is restricted by the end limiting means, the game rounding operation should be replaced. However, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the target game rotation operation does not exist.

Feature B6. The game-turning execution means executes the game-turning operation so that the game-turning operation becomes a stop result (stop result corresponding to the jackpot result) corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination by the transition-determining means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B5, which is characterized in that it is a pachinko machine.

According to the above configuration, even when the game rotation destination execution means performs the game rotation operation before the transition determination of the transition determination means, the game rotation operation can be suitably executed. That is, the transition determination of the transition determination means is not performed at the time when the game destination execution means starts the game rotation operation, but the transition determination is not performed by the game destination execution means as shown in the feature B1. As a game rounding operation corresponding to, the game rounding operation is started before the transition determination. Then, in the above configuration, the subsequent stop result also starts as corresponding to the transition determination. That is, before the transition determination of the transition determination means, the determination result is determined first, and the game rounding operation is started as the corresponding stop result. By doing so, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the corresponding game rounding operation is started and ended before the transition determination.

Feature B7. The stop result of the game turn operation started by the game turn destination execution means is a stop result when the determination result of the shift determination by the shift determination means is the shift correspondence result. Features The gaming machine according to B6.

According to the above configuration, the game turn destination execution means starts the game turn operation so as to be a stop result of the transition correspondence result. In this case, although there is a possibility that the result of the transition determination performed by the transition determination means that is performed thereafter may not be the transition correspondence result, the player expects that it is the transition correspondence result, and pays attention to the game rotation operation. It is possible to increase the degree.

Feature B8. The gaming machine according to feature B7, wherein the winning probability of the transition determination by the transition determination means is 50% or more.

According to the above configuration, 50% or more of the migration correspondence results are the migration correspondence results. Therefore, when the game rotation destination execution means starts the game rotation operation, the migration correspondence result is not related to the migration judgment of the migration correspondence result. Even if the game rotation operation is started so as to be a stop result, it is possible to reduce the events that do not result in the transition correspondence result after that. As a result, the event that the stop result of the game rounding operation corresponds to the transition correspondence result, but the judgment result of the transition determination means does not actually shift to the special state unlike the transition correspondence result is reduced. can do. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the confusion and disappointment given to the player.

The higher the probability of winning the transition determination, the better, and more preferably 100%.

Feature B9. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry portion, an advantageous determination as to whether or not to shift the gaming state to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and more disadvantageous than the special state is executed. Advantageous determination means (a function of executing the hit / fail determination process on the normal drawing side by the main control device 71) and
When the determination result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is the advantageous response result corresponding to the transition to the advantageous state, the advantageous transition means for shifting the gaming state to the advantageous state (general diagram by the main control device 71). Function to execute processing during confirmation) and
Equipped with
When the grasping means grasps that the gaming ball that has entered the second ball entry portion does not enter the first ball entry portion, the second gaming round execution means is described by the advantageous determination means. Based on the fact that the advantage determination has been made, the display means starts the game rotation operation, sets the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the advantage determination, and ends the game rotation operation. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B8.

According to the above configuration, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry portion, the transition determination is not performed, but at least the advantageous determination is performed, so that the game rotation operation without the transition determination is performed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention in the case of a problem. However, since the special state is more advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, it is assumed that the player is more interested in whether or not to shift to the special state than the advantageous state. As described above, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention to the game rotation operation without the transition determination, while retaining the significance of starting the game rotation operation as corresponding to the transition determination by the game rotation destination execution means. ..

Feature B10. When it is grasped by the grasping means that the ball enters the first ball entry portion, the display means or another effect means can cause the ball to enter the first ball entry portion. It is equipped with a special notification executing means (a function of displaying the special holding image P3 on the symbol display device 42 by the sound / light control device 300) for executing the special notification of the above.
When the grasping means grasps that the ball does not enter the first ball entry portion, the special notification executing means executes the special notification with a predetermined probability (step S2707 and step S2708 by the main control device 71). The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing).

According to the above configuration, the player can know that the game ball enters the first ball entry section by performing the special notification. In this configuration, the special notification is performed with a predetermined probability not only when the ball enters the first ball entry section but also when the ball does not enter the first ball entry section, so that the player determines that the special notification is a transition. It is expected to correspond to the entry into the first entry section to be performed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature B11. A game ball provided in a ball passage area (game ball passage area R) through which a game ball can pass from the second ball entry section to the first ball entry section, and the game ball entered into the second ball entry section. A distribution means for distributing the ball into either a first passage (first passage 51a) that allows the ball to enter the first ball entry portion or a second passage (second passage 51b) that does not allow the ball to enter the first ball entry portion. Equipped with (distribution plate 54)
The grasping means grasps which passage of the first passage or the second passage the distribution means distributes the game ball, so that the game ball entering the second entry portion is described. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, characterized in that it is for grasping whether or not to enter the first ball entry portion.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to change whether or not the game ball that has entered the second entry section is allowed to enter the first entry section by the distribution means. Therefore, by entering the second entry section, it is possible to enter the first entry section, but even if the ball enters the second entry section, everything enters the first entry section. Instead of playing a ball, there are cases where the game rounding operation is performed by the second game round execution means and cases where the game rounding operation corresponding to the first ball entry portion is performed by the game round destination executing means. be able to. This makes it possible to diversify the production.

Feature B12. The distribution means is characterized in that, as a predetermined number of gaming balls enter the second entry portion, the game shifts to a state in which the game balls enter the first entry portion. Feature The gaming machine according to B11.

According to the above configuration, the distribution means shifts to a state in which a predetermined number of game balls enter the second entry portion and the game balls enter the first entry portion. .. That is, in order to enter the game ball into the first entry section and receive the transition determination, it is one condition that a predetermined number of game balls are entered in the second entry section. In this case, it is considered that the player who plays the game machine positively continues the game with the expectation that some privilege will be obtained by entering a predetermined number of game balls in the second ball entry section. .. This makes it possible to encourage the player to continue playing. In addition, it is possible to improve the interest in the game and, by extension, increase the player's motivation to play.

<Characteristic C group>
The following feature C group is "as a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming ball launched by a player operating a launching device or the like enters a ball entry portion provided in a gaming area. A lottery is performed based on this, and a variable display of the pattern is performed on the display screen of the display device. Furthermore, if a winning result is obtained in the lottery, a combination of specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen. At the same time, it is known that the player shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-074175). In such a gaming machine, the gaming ball has entered the ball entry portion. The lottery for transition to the special gaming state based on the above is drawn with a predetermined probability for each occurrence of a ball in the ball entry section. Further, while this lottery and the variable display corresponding to this lottery are performed. When a ball enters the ball entry section, the information is stored in a predetermined number, and then a lottery or a variable display is performed based on the information. Therefore, the above-mentioned ball entry is generally performed. If the specified number of information corresponding to the above is already stored, even if the ball enters the ball entry section, the lottery for transition to the special gaming state cannot be received, which may be disadvantageous to the player. This may lead to a decline in the interest of the game. Therefore, there is still room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the interest of the game. ”This was done in view of the technical background and issues.

Features C1. A launching means (launching operation device 28) that launches a gaming ball toward the gaming area (gaming area PE) by being operated by the player, and
A ball entry section (through gate 35A) where a game ball launched by the launching means and flowing down the game area can enter, and
Information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing on the special figure side by the main control device 71) for acquiring special information when the game ball enters the ball entry portion, and
Acquisition information that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number (PS1 = 1 in the first to third embodiments, PS2 = 4 in the fourth embodiment). Storage means (in the first to third embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S901 to S905 by the main control device 71, and in the fourth embodiment, the processing of steps S2906 to S2910 by the main control device 71. Function to execute) and
For each special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the grant correspondence result corresponding to granting the first privilege (opening / closing execution mode of the real hit mode based on the real hit result A) to the player. The first privilege granting means (special electric power by the main control device 71 in the fourth embodiment) that grants the first privilege when the grant determination is sequentially performed and the determination result is the grant correspondence result. Function to execute processing during confirmation) and
In a gaming machine equipped with
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for counting the number of gaming balls entering the ball entry portion (a function of executing the processing of steps S2701 to S2703 by the main control device 71).

According to the feature C1, special information is acquired by inserting a game ball into the ball entry portion, and is stored in the acquired information storage means until the special information reaches a predetermined number. That is, after reaching a predetermined number, special information is not acquired even if the ball is entered into the ball entry section. On the other hand, the counting of the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion is continued even after the predetermined number is reached. Therefore, for example, when the number of balls entered reaches a predetermined specific number, some processing can be performed, and it is possible to make it meaningful to insert the game ball into the ball entry portion. Therefore, even if the number of special information has reached a predetermined number, it is possible to improve the interest.

The above-mentioned processing may be, for example, a processing for giving a privilege to the player, or a processing for notifying that a specific number has been reached by a predetermined notification means.

Feature C2. For each special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the player receives the first privilege (open / close execution mode in the first to third embodiments, and the actual hit result A in the fourth embodiment). The grant determination is made as to whether or not the grant correspondence result corresponds to the granting of the opening / closing execution mode of the substantial hit mode based on the above, and when the determination result is the grant correspondence result, the first privilege is given. The first privilege granting means (function to execute the special electric confirmation processing by the main control device 71) and
When the number of balls entered into the ball entry portion reaches a specific number (256), the player is given a second privilege (opening / closing execution mode in the first to third embodiments, substantially in the fourth embodiment). It is equipped with a second privilege granting means (a function of realizing the ceiling by the distribution plate 54 in the special accessory 33) that grants the opening / closing execution mode of the real hit mode based on the hit result A or the real hit result B). A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the above configuration, since it is possible to receive a grant determination as to whether or not the first privilege can be obtained by inserting the game ball into the entry section, the player causes the game ball to enter the entry section. Manipulate the launch means for. On the other hand, when the special information reaches a predetermined number, no more special information is stored, and in such a situation, can the first privilege be obtained even if the game ball is put into the ball entry section? I can't receive the grant judgment. Therefore, it is not preferable for the player to continue the operation of the launching means because it is a wasteful launch. However, in the gaming machine of this configuration, the second privilege is given when the number of balls entering the ball entry section reaches a specific number, so that the situation where the special information has reached the predetermined number, that is, the game balls are entered. Even in a situation where it is not possible to receive a grant determination as to whether or not to obtain the first privilege even after entering the ball, it is meaningful to at least enter the ball. In other words, it is related to the second privilege, which raises the expectation of granting a privilege by reaching a specific number by letting the ball enter the entry section regardless of whether the special information has reached a predetermined number, and the ceiling of reaching a specific number. Since the player can expect to obtain at least one of the first privilege that can be expected to be granted each time, it is possible to improve the interest even if the special information has reached the predetermined number. can.

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to feature C2, wherein the specific number is larger than the predetermined number.

According to the above configuration, the effect described in the feature C2 can be obtained in relation to the predetermined number and the specific number.

Feature C4. It is provided with a lottery means (a function of executing the processes of step S1004 and steps S1006 to S1008 by the main control device 71) for executing a lottery as to whether or not to give the second privilege to the player.
The lottery means executes a lottery as to whether or not to grant the second privilege when the number of balls entered into the ball entry portion reaches the specific number.
The second privilege granting means is characterized in that when the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning result corresponding to the granting of the second privilege, the second privilege is granted to the player. The gaming machine according to the feature C2 or the feature C3.

According to the above configuration, when the number of balls entered into the ball entry portion reaches a specific number, the second privilege is not uniformly given, but is given through a lottery by a lottery means. As a result, the effect of the above-mentioned feature C2 can be achieved without increasing the ball ejection rate too much.

Feature C5. A first state (guided state) in which a game ball is easily entered into the ball entry portion provided in the ball entry portion, and a ball entry state that allows entry into the ball entry portion but is more than the first state. A variable ball entry means (Public accessory 35d) that can be switched between the second state (non-induction state), which makes it difficult to enter the ball, and
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing a normal electric control process by the main control device 71) for executing switching control for temporarily changing the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state, and
Equipped with
As the game state, a high frequency state (high frequency support mode) and a low frequency state (low frequency support mode) in which the frequency at which the switching control is performed by the variable ball entry means is relatively high or low are set.
A state transition means (main control device) that shifts the gaming state to either the high frequency state or the low frequency state when each privilege is granted by the first privilege granting means or the second privilege granting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C2 to C4, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing a special electric termination process according to 71).

According to the above configuration, when either the first privilege or the second privilege is given, the gaming state shifts to the high frequency state or the low frequency state. In the high frequency state, it is easier to enter the ball entry portion, so that it is easier to receive the grant determination as to whether or not to obtain the first privilege than in the low frequency state. In addition, in the case of a high frequency state, it is expected that the number of balls entering the ball entry section will increase at the same time. That is, since the number of balls entered in the ball entry portion easily reaches a specific number, it becomes easy to receive the second privilege. Thereby, a new game can be provided by utilizing the configuration of the feature C4.

Specifically, for example, if the configuration is such that when the first privilege is granted, the transition to the high frequency state is performed, and when the second privilege is granted, the transition to the low frequency state is made, and the player receives the first privilege. After obtaining the ball, the number of balls entering the ball entry section can be easily reached to a specific number to obtain the second privilege. On the other hand, after getting the second privilege, it shifts to the low frequency state, so it is better to get the first privilege by receiving the grant judgment by the judgment means than to get the second privilege in the high frequency state. It is preferable for the person. Therefore, when the number of stored special information reaches a predetermined number in a high frequency state, it is not preferable for the player to further enter the ball into the ball entry portion. However, for example, when the high frequency state is about to end due to some end condition (time or number of games) other than the grant of each privilege, the number of balls entered is specified in order to obtain the second privilege as described above. It is also preferable to reach. Therefore, when the number of stored special information reaches a predetermined number, it is possible to create a case where it is preferable and a case where it is not preferable for the player to further enter the ball into the ball entry portion, and to diversify the game. Is possible.

Further, in the case of this configuration, if the first privilege is obtained at the timing when the number of balls entered is close to the specific number and the state shifts to the high frequency state, the second privilege is immediately granted and the state shifts to the low frequency state. It is easy to receive the grant judgment of whether or not to obtain the first privilege (it is easy to let the game ball enter the ball entry part), and it will shift to the low frequency state without receiving the benefit of the high frequency state so much. That is, it is preferable for the player to obtain the first privilege at a timing when the number of balls entered is far from the specific number because it is easy to receive the benefit of the high frequency state. Therefore, for example, in a configuration in which the number of balls entered into the ball entry section and the number of times the grant determination is made are displayed on the gaming machine or the gaming hall, the player positively selects a platform in which the number of balls entered is far from a specific number. It is assumed that the game will be played by selecting. Therefore, it is possible to actively play a game even if the number of balls entered is far from a specific number, which tends to be avoided in a gaming machine that can obtain a privilege when the number of balls reaches a specific number.

Further, for example, if the configuration is such that when the first privilege is given, the state is shifted to the low frequency state, and when the second privilege is given, the transition is made to the high frequency state, and the player obtains the second privilege. After that, it is possible to easily continue to reach a specific number, so that the second privilege can be further obtained. In this case, if the first privilege is obtained before reaching a specific number, the frequency will shift to a low frequency state. That is, the launching means is operated so as to further enter the ball entering portion in a state where the number of stored special information is a predetermined number. Further, even if the first privilege is obtained and the state shifts to the low frequency state, at least as described in the feature C2, when the number of balls entering the ball entry portion reaches a predetermined number, the second Since the privilege can be obtained, the significance of entering the ball into the ball entry section is maintained when the number of stored special information is a predetermined number.

In this way, it is possible to create a new game by using each privilege and each frequency state, and by providing these new games, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C6. In the high-frequency state, a high-frequency state (high-frequency support mode with a limited number of times) that shifts to the low-frequency state by executing the grant determination a predetermined number of times (100 times) is performed. The gaming machine according to feature C5, which is characterized by being included.

According to the above configuration, after any of the benefits is granted, it is possible to improve the soundness of the game without increasing the ball ejection rate too much as compared with the configuration that shifts to the high frequency state with no limit on the number of grant judgments. can.

Further, with this configuration, the following new games can be provided in relation to the specific number and the predetermined number of times.

That is, in the number-limited high-frequency state, if the number of balls entered into the ball-entry portion reaches a specific number before the number of grant determinations reaches a predetermined number, the second privilege is granted during this number-limited high-frequency state. Further, when the number of balls entered into the ball entry portion reaches a specific number after the number of grant determinations reaches a predetermined number, the second privilege is granted after shifting from the high frequency state to the low frequency state. Then, as a player, the grant judgment as to whether or not the first privilege can be obtained in the high frequency state with a limited number of times is received for a specified number of times, and then the second privilege is obtained immediately after shifting to the low frequency state. Adjust the number of balls entering the ball entry section so that it can be done. By doing so, it is possible to provide a new game in which the operation of the launching means is adjusted in relation to the specific number and the predetermined number of times.

In addition, in order to realize the above-mentioned game, it is preferable that the predetermined number of times is less than the specific number.

Feature C7. A second means (step S2710 by the main control device 71) for counting the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion in a situation where the number of special information stored by the acquired information storage means has reached the predetermined number. And a function to execute the process of step S2711)
In the high frequency state of limiting the number of times, when the number of balls entered by the second means becomes the second specific number (156), which is a number smaller than the specific number, the second specific number is reached. It is provided with a second notification executing means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3206 and S3207 by the sound / light control device 300) to execute the notification to that effect.
The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein the second specific number is set to be equal to or less than a number obtained by subtracting the predetermined number of times from the specific number.

According to the above configuration, the second means counts the number of balls entered when the grant determination is not made even if the game ball is inserted into the ball entry portion. That is, the number of balls entered is a number that can shorten the number up to a specific number even though the grant determination is not performed in the high frequency state where the number of times is limited. Further, the number obtained by subtracting the predetermined number of times from the specific number is the maximum value of the number that can be shortened. Since the second specific number to be notified by the second notification executing means is set to be equal to or less than this maximum value, the player should understand that the number that can be shortened is the limit in the high frequency state where the number of times is limited. Is possible. This makes it easier for the player to play the game described in the feature C6.

Feature C8. The state transition means shifts the gaming state to the low frequency state of the high frequency state and the low frequency state with a predetermined probability, triggered by the granting of each of the benefits.
The first probability that the state transition means shifts the gaming state to the low frequency state when the first privilege is granted by the first privilege granting means is the second probability by the second privilege granting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C5 to C7, characterized in that the gaming state is set lower than the second probability of shifting to the low frequency state when the privilege is given.

According to the above configuration, the probability of shifting to the low frequency state is higher when the second privilege is granted than when the first privilege is granted. That is, if the second privilege is given when the number of balls entering the ball entry section reaches a specific number, it is easy to shift to a low frequency state in the subsequent game, and the grant is made when the ball enters the entry section. If the first privilege is given when the judgment is won, it is easy to shift to the high frequency state in the subsequent games. As a result, it is possible to play a game even on a platform far from a specific number without paying too much attention only to the fact that the number of balls entering the ball entry portion reaches a specific number in this gaming machine.

Feature C9. When the game ball enters the ball entry section, the game ball can enter the first special entry section (first special winning opening 52) and the second special entry section (second special winning section). Mouth 253) and
A game ball provided in a ball passage area (game ball passage area R) through which a game ball that has entered the ball entry section passes, and a game ball that has entered the ball entry section cannot enter the second special entry section. The first passage (first passage 51a) that is possible and can enter the first special entry portion, and the second special entry portion that cannot enter the first special entry portion and can enter the second special entry portion. A distribution means (distribution plate 54) for distributing to any of the second passages (second passage 51b) capable of entering the unit, and
Equipped with
The distribution means changes the distribution destination of the game ball based on the arrival of the game ball that has entered the ball entry portion, and the specific number of game balls enters the ball entry portion. Along with this, the game shifts to a state in which a game ball is allowed to enter the first special entry section.
The information acquisition means acquires the special information based on the entry into the second special entry section.
Any of the features C2 to C8, wherein the second privilege granting means is in a state where the second privilege can be granted based on the ball entering the first special ball entry portion. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the above configuration, the game balls that enter the ball entry section are distributed to the second special entry section before the number of entry hits reaches a specific number, and when the number reaches a specific number, the first special number is reached. It is distributed to the ball entry section. Then, special information is acquired based on the entry into the second special entry section, and the grant determination is made. In addition, the second privilege is given based on the entry into the first special entry section. With such a configuration, the second privilege, which raises the expectation of the privilege grant by reaching a specific number, and the privilege grant each time the ball enters the ball entry section regardless of the specific number if the number is less than the predetermined number. The first privilege that can be expected is realized by using a mechanical operation such as distribution by a distribution means.

Feature C10. The distribution means has n (n ≧ 2) distribution members (n ≧ 2) that alternately distribute the game balls flowing down from the upstream side in the ball passing region between the first passage side and the second passage side. For example, it has eight distribution plates 54).
The n distribution members are arranged so that when the game ball is distributed to the first passage side by the distribution member in the front stage, the game ball reaches the distribution member in the rear stage. ,
When the number of balls entered in the ball entry section reaches the specified number, all the distribution destinations of the game balls for the n distribution members are on the first passage side, and the game balls are the first special entry section. The gaming machine according to feature C9, which is characterized in that it shifts to a state of entering a ball.

According to the above configuration, n distribution members are provided from the upstream side to the downstream side in the ball passing region, and when the distribution destination of the distribution member in the previous stage is on the first passage side, the distribution member in the subsequent stage is provided. The game ball can reach. Then, as the game ball enters the ball entry section, the distribution destination of each distribution member changes, and when the distribution destination of all the distribution members is on the first aisle side, the game ball enters the first special entry section. Ball. In this case, the distribution member of each stage alternately changes the distribution destination between the first aisle side and the second aisle side each time the game ball arrives. Therefore, in order to change the number of game balls required to set all the distribution destinations of each distribution member to the first passage side (that is, the number of balls required to enter the first special entry portion), the distribution member By changing the number of installations (that is, "n"), it is possible to easily carry out a design change regarding entry into the first special entry section. For example, in a gaming machine, in order to make it difficult to acquire the second privilege (reduce the chance of entering the first special ball entry section), increase the number of distribution members installed (number of installation stages) and acquire the second privilege. To make it easier (to increase the chances of entering the first special ball entry section), it is advisable to reduce the number of distribution members installed (number of installation stages).

When the two states are switched alternately in each distribution member, the game ball that has entered the ball entry section enters the first special entry section once every 2 n times of entry. Will be. In other words, the nth power of 2 becomes the upper limit number of times (ceiling), and when the upper limit number of times is reached, the game ball enters the first special entry section. If n = 8, the ceiling is 2 to the 8th power = 256.

Feature C11. Each of the distribution members is a swinging body swingably supported in the ball passing region, and swings when the gaming ball hits when the gaming ball passes, and the distribution destination of the gaming ball is switched. The gaming machine according to feature C10, characterized in that it is present.

According to the above configuration, when the game ball hits each distribution member, the distribution destination is switched by the mechanical swinging motion of each distribution member. In this case, since the distribution destination by the distribution member is not determined by electrical processing, arithmetic processing for switching the distribution destination is unnecessary, and power consumption does not occur at the time of distribution. Further, since it is not affected by the electric signal, there is no inconvenience that the distribution destination is operated by an illegal electric signal.

Feature C12. A drive means driven so that the distribution destination of the distribution means is either the first passage side or the second passage side.
A control means for determining the distribution destination of the distribution means and driving the drive means based on the result,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C9 to C11.

According to the above configuration, the distribution destination of the distribution means can be switched by control. As a result, the game content (specifications) and the game production can be diversified. For example, it is advisable to change a specific number (the number of balls required for the game ball to enter the first special ball entry portion) between the normal state and the high accuracy state.

Further, in a configuration having a plurality of distribution members (distribution plates 54) as distribution means as in the feature C10, it is preferable that the distribution members are individually driven. In this case, for any of the distribution members, the distribution destination can be fixed to the first passage side or the second passage side by driving the driving means, whereby a specific number (the first game ball) can be fixed. The number of balls required to enter the special ball entry section) can be changed to either the increase side or the decrease side.

For example, when the distribution destination of five distribution members (distribution plate 54) is fixed to the first passage side and the remaining three distribution members are not fixed, the ball entry portion. When the number of balls entered in the above is "8 (= 2 cubed)", the game balls enter the first special entry section. That is, the game ball can be entered into the first special entry portion once every eight passes.

<Characteristic D group>
In addition, the following feature D group is "as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the ball entry portion provided in the game area, and a pattern is displayed on the display screen of the display device. It is known that when a winning result is obtained in the lottery, the combination of specific symbols is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the game shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-074175). Then, when the game shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the ball enters the ball entry device. A large amount of gaming balls are paid out based on the above. The lottery for transition to the special gaming state based on the entry of the gaming balls into the above-mentioned entry section is determined for each occurrence of the entry of the entry section. Therefore, the expected number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who has continued the game for a long time and a player who has completed the game in a short period of time is the same, and the player is reluctant to continue the game. It was made in view of the technical background and issues such as "There is a concern that it will become."

Feature D1. A ball passing portion (ball passing port 33a) through which a game ball launched by a launching means (launching operation device 28) and flowing down the game area can pass, and
A special winning section (special winning opening 52) that allows the game ball to win a prize by passing the game ball through the ball passing section.
A game ball provided in a ball passing area (game ball passing area R) through which a game ball can pass from the ball passing portion to the special winning section, and the game ball passing through the ball passing section is awarded to the special winning section. A distribution means (distribution plate 54) for distributing to either a possible first passage (first passage 51a) or a second passage (second passage 51b) that cannot win a prize in the special winning section.
Equipped with
The distribution means changes the distribution destination of the game ball based on the arrival of the game ball that has passed through the ball passing portion, and the predetermined number of game balls pass through the ball passing portion. A gaming machine characterized in that it shifts to a state in which a gaming ball is awarded to a special winning section.

According to the feature D1, when the game ball flows down the game area due to the launch operation by the player, the game ball passes through the predetermined ball passing portion, so that the game ball can be won in the special winning section. Become. In this case, in the ball passing area from the ball passing section to the special winning section, the game ball that has passed through the ball passing section is placed in the first passage (passage that can win the special winning section) and the second passage (in the special winning section). Since there is a distribution means to distribute to one of the passages where winning is not possible, not all the game balls will win the special winning section just because the game ball passes through the ball passing section. Only when the distribution is made to the first passage side by the distribution means, the special prize section is awarded.

In particular, the distribution means changes the distribution destination of the game ball based on the arrival of the game ball that has passed through the ball passing portion, and a special prize is awarded as a predetermined number of game balls pass through the ball passing portion. It is supposed to shift to the state where the game ball is won by the club. That is, in order to make a game ball win a prize in the special winning section and obtain a predetermined privilege, it is one condition that a predetermined number of game balls are passed in the ball passing section. In this case, it is considered that the player who plays the game machine positively continues the game with the expectation that some privilege will be obtained by passing a predetermined number of game balls in the ball passing portion. This makes it possible to encourage the player to continue playing. In addition, it is possible to improve the interest in the game and, by extension, increase the player's motivation to play.

Feature D2. The distribution means has n (n ≧ 2) distribution members (n ≧ 2) that alternately distribute the game balls flowing down from the upstream side in the ball passing region between the first passage side and the second passage side. For example, it has eight distribution plates 54).
The n distribution members are arranged so that when the game ball is distributed to the first passage side by the distribution member in the front stage, the game ball reaches the distribution member in the rear stage. ,
When the number of passing game balls in the ball passing portion reaches the predetermined number, all the distribution destinations of the game balls for the n distribution members are on the first passage side, and the game balls win the special winning portion. The gaming machine according to feature D1, which is characterized in that it is adapted to shift to.

According to the above configuration, n distribution members are provided from the upstream side to the downstream side in the ball passing region, and when the distribution destination of the distribution member in the previous stage is on the first passage side, the distribution member in the subsequent stage is provided. The game ball can reach. Then, as the game ball passes through the ball passing portion, the distribution destination of each distribution member changes, and when the distribution destination of all the distribution members is on the first aisle side, the game ball wins the special prize section. In this case, the distribution member of each stage alternately changes the distribution destination between the first aisle side and the second aisle side each time the game ball arrives. Therefore, in order to change the number of game balls required to set all the distribution destinations of each distribution member to the first passage side (that is, the number of balls required to win a prize in the special winning section), the number of the distribution members installed (that is, the number of balls required to win the special prize section) That is, it is sufficient to change "n"), and it is possible to easily carry out a design change regarding winning a prize in the special winning section. For example, in a gaming machine, in order to make it difficult to obtain benefits (reduce the chances of winning a prize in the special winning section), increase the number of distribution members installed (number of installation stages) to make it easier to obtain benefits (to the special winning section). To increase the chances of winning a prize), it is advisable to reduce the number of distribution members installed (number of installation stages).

When the two states are alternately switched in each distribution member, the game ball that has passed through the ball passing portion wins the special winning portion only once every 2 n times of passing the ball. In other words, the nth power of 2 becomes the upper limit number of times (ceiling), and when the upper limit number of times is reached, the game ball wins the special prize section. If n = 8, the ceiling is 2 to the 8th power = 256.

Feature D3. Each of the distribution members is a swinging body swingably supported in the ball passing region, and swings when the gaming ball hits when the gaming ball passes, and the distribution destination of the gaming ball is switched. The gaming machine according to feature D2, which is characterized by being present.

According to the above configuration, when the game ball hits each distribution member, the distribution destination is switched by the mechanical swinging motion of each distribution member. In this case, since the distribution destination by the distribution member is not determined by electrical processing, arithmetic processing for switching the distribution destination is unnecessary, and power consumption does not occur at the time of distribution. Further, since it is not affected by the electric signal, there is no inconvenience that the distribution destination is operated by an illegal electric signal.

Feature D4. In addition to the special winning section, a general winning section (general winning slot 53) is provided as a winning slot that allows a game ball to win a prize by passing through the ball passing section.
The special winning section (special winning opening 52) is a first lottery opportunity winning section in which a lottery process is executed to determine whether or not a privilege is given to a player when a game ball is won.
The general winning section is a winning section in which the lottery process is not executed even if the game ball wins.
The sorting means is characterized in that the game ball is distributed to either the special winning section or the general winning section based on the arrival of the gaming ball that has passed through the ball passing section. The gaming machine according to any one of D1 to D3.

According to the above configuration, when the game ball passes through the ball passing section, a prize is generated in either the special winning section or the general winning section, and the payout of the game ball can be expected along with the winning. That is, for the player, some benefit is brought about by the game ball passing through the ball passing portion. Partly because of that, the player is encouraged to launch and operate the launching means aiming at the passage of the game ball at the ball passing part, and as a result, the number of balls passing at the ball passing part increases and the special winning part is entered. The chances of winning a prize will increase.

Feature D5. The gaming machine according to feature D4, wherein the winning probability of the lottery process performed when a gaming ball wins in the special winning portion is 50% or more.

According to the above configuration, since the winning probability at the time of winning the special winning section (first lottery opportunity winning section) is 50% or more, a predetermined number of game balls pass through the ball passing section. Players can get benefits with high probability. Therefore, it is also possible to encourage the player to continue playing.

The winning probability of the lottery process may be 80% or more, or may be approximately 100%.

Feature D6. In the game area, in addition to the special winning unit as the first lottery opportunity winning unit, a second lottery opportunity winning unit (operating port 34) in which the lottery process is executed in association with the winning of the game ball is provided. The gaming machine according to feature D4 or D5.

According to the above configuration, even before a predetermined number of game balls pass through the ball passing portion (ball passing opening 33a), that is, before the game ball wins the first lottery opportunity winning portion (special winning portion). Even so, since the lottery process is carried out by winning a game ball in the second lottery opportunity winning part, which is different from the first lottery opportunity winning part, the player during the game has another chance to win. Can be given. For example, immediately after the number of balls passed through the ball passing portion reaches a predetermined number and the lottery process is performed, there is a time lag before the next lottery process, and the player's willingness to continue playing is reduced. However, if the lottery process is carried out by winning the second lottery opportunity winning section as described above, it is possible to keep the expectation of winning at any time, and the player can continue the game. Can be urged.

Feature D7. In the game area, a second ball passing portion (through gate 35A) through which the game ball can pass is provided on the upstream side of the first ball passing portion (ball passing port 33a) as the ball passing portion, and the game ball can be passed. The game ball can pass through the first ball passing portion on condition that it passes through the second ball passing portion.
Whether to grant the first privilege (game privilege in the opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the fact that the game ball passes through the first ball passing portion and wins the special winning portion (special winning opening 52). A lottery means for drawing whether or not to give a second privilege (game privilege in the support execution mode) to the player based on the fact that the game ball passes through the second ball passing portion. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D6, which comprises (MPU 82 of the main control device 71).

According to the above configuration, when the player launches the game ball aiming at the first ball passing portion, it also aims at the second ball passing portion at the same time. In this case, if the game ball passes through the second ball passing portion, the lottery process for the second privilege is performed. Further, when the game ball passes through the first ball passing portion following the second ball passing portion, if the number of times the ball passes in the first ball passing portion reaches a predetermined number, the game ball wins the special winning section. Then, the lottery process for the second privilege is performed. Here, the player has more chances to obtain not only the second privilege but also the first privilege by passing the game ball at each of the above-mentioned passing portions, and the motivation to continue the game is increased.

Feature D8. It is a gaming machine that determines the effect content based on the lottery result by the lottery means and performs the effect by the effect device (design display device 42) based on the effect content.
The first effect is determined based on the lottery result of the first privilege when winning the special prize section, and the second effect is determined based on the lottery result of the second privilege when the game ball is passed to the second ball passing section. The gaming machine according to feature D7, wherein the second staging is performed by the staging device.

According to the above configuration, the first effect according to the lottery result of the first privilege and the second effect according to the lottery result of the second privilege are performed by the same effect device. In this case, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the effect is for the first privilege or the second privilege while the effect is being executed by the effect device. Therefore, at the time of performing the production of the production device, the player can be interested in whether the production is the first production or the second production, and can increase the interest in the production. If the winning of the special winning section is not directly visible to the player, whether this production is based on the winning of the special winning section (special winning opening 52) or the second ball passing section (through gate). It is not possible to determine whether it is due to the passage of the ball in 35A), and it is possible to further increase the degree of attention of the player regarding the granting of benefits.

It is preferable that the first effect and the second effect include the same form of effect. For example, when the variable symbol is changed in the symbol display device as the effect device, the same variable symbol is changed in both the first effect and the second effect, and only the final finalized symbol is the first. The design for the production and the design for the second production are used.

It is preferable that the expected number of prize balls is set higher for the first privilege than for the second privilege. In this case, the player plays the game in anticipation of the generation of the first privilege, which has a large expected number of prize balls, but the first privilege and the first privilege are obtained from the effect of the effect device and the distribution means which is not visible. It is not possible to recognize which of the two privilege production processes is currently being executed. As a result, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the lottery result by making the player expect the occurrence of the first privilege.

Feature D9. It has a cover member (cover member 60) that covers the distribution means from the front of the gaming machine.
The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D8, wherein the cover member makes the sorting means invisible to the player.

According to the above configuration, the cover member makes it impossible to visually recognize the distribution means from the front of the gaming machine. As a result, whether the distribution destination of the distribution means is the first passage (passage that can win the special winning section) or the second passage (passage that cannot win the special winning section). It can be difficult for the player to grasp. Further, although it is impossible for the player to visually recognize the distribution means, it is possible to recognize the existence of the distribution means by the cover member provided in the game area, and the game ball is distributed. It can raise the attention of the player.

Feature D10. In the process in which the number of passing game balls passing through the ball passing portion approaches the predetermined number, when the number of passing game balls reaches a predetermined intermediate number smaller than the predetermined number, the intermediate number is reached. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, which comprises a notification executing means (a function of executing steps S408 and S409) for executing notification processing for notifying a player of arrival.

According to the above configuration, the number of balls passing through the ball passing portion gradually increases, and the number of passing balls is a predetermined intermediate number smaller than the predetermined number (the number of balls for which the game ball is awarded to the special winning portion). When the player reaches, the player is notified that the mediant number has been reached. As a result, the player can grasp to some extent how soon the game ball will win the special prize section, and can raise the expectation for the prize. This also makes it possible to encourage the continuation of the game.

Feature D11. A drive means driven so that the distribution destination of the distribution means is either the first passage side or the second passage side.
A control means for determining the distribution destination of the distribution means and driving the drive means based on the result,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D10.

According to the above configuration, the distribution destination of the distribution means can be switched by control. As a result, the game content (specifications) and the game production can be diversified. For example, it is advisable to change a predetermined number (the number of passing balls required to make the game ball win the special winning section) between the normal state and the high accuracy state.

Further, in a configuration having a plurality of distribution members (distribution plates 54) as distribution means as in feature D2, it is preferable that the distribution members are individually driven. In this case, for any of the distribution members, the distribution destination can be fixed to the first aisle side or the second aisle side by driving the driving means, whereby a predetermined number (special prize for the game ball) can be fixed. It is possible to change the number of ball passages required to win a prize in the section) to either the increase side or the decrease side.

For example, when the distribution destination of 5 distribution members (distribution plate 54) is fixed to the first passage side and the remaining 3 distribution members are not fixed, the ball passing portion. If the number of passages of the game ball in the above becomes "8 (= 2 to the third power)", the game ball will win the special prize section. That is, it is possible to make the special winning section win a game ball once every eight passes.

<Characteristic E group>
In addition, in the following feature E group, "as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery for transition to a special game state such as a hit is performed based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area. At the same time, a variable display of the pattern is performed on the display screen of the display device, and when a winning result is obtained in the lottery, the combination of specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, which is advantageous for the player. A configuration for shifting to a special gaming state is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-074175). Here, in pachinko machines and the like, it is required to increase the degree of attention to the game, and from this viewpoint. There is still room for improvement. ”This was done in view of the technical background and issues.

Features E1. Based on the fact that the predetermined first condition (the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 52 or the operating opening 34) is satisfied, the first game rounding operation (the symbol display device 42) is performed by the predetermined notification means (design display device 42). A function for executing a special figure special electric control process by a main control device 71, a sound light control device, for starting a special figure sub-variation) and ending the first game turn operation as a predetermined stop result. (Function to execute the effect determination process by 300) and
Based on the fact that the predetermined second condition (winning of the game ball to the through gate 35A) is satisfied, the second game rounding operation (general drawing sub) is performed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means. (Variation) is started, and the second game round operation is terminated as a predetermined stop result. Function to execute the production decision process) and
Equipped with
The first game round execution means determines the operation continuation period (variable display time) of the first game round operation according to the operation status of the second game round operation by the second game round execution means. Means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2005 and S2008 by the main control device 71 in the second embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of steps S2503 to S2507 and step S2510 by the main control device 71 in the third embodiment. ) Is provided as a gaming machine.

According to the feature E1, in a gaming machine in which a plurality of gaming rotations are performed, the operation duration of one gaming rotation operation (first gaming rotation operation) is set to the operation duration of the other gaming rotation operation (second gaming rotation). Since it is determined according to the operation status of the operation), it is possible to have a relationship between these game rotation operations. Specifically, for example, by ending one game rotation motion after, earlier, or simultaneously ending the other game rotation motion, each game rotation motion is used. It is possible to diversify the production. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature E2. When the first condition is satisfied in a situation where the second game rounding operation is being executed, a grasping means (second implementation) for grasping the remaining operation continuation period of the second game rounding operation being executed. It is provided with a function of executing the process of step S2005 by the main control device 71 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the process of steps S2503 to S2507 by the main control device 71 in the third embodiment).
When the first condition is satisfied in a situation where the second gaming operation is being executed, the determination means grasps the operation continuation period of the first gaming operation accompanying the establishment of the first condition. Means for determining the remaining operation duration of the second gaming operation grasped by the means (a function of executing the process of step S2008 by the main control device 71 in the second embodiment, main control in the third embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing the process of step S2510 by the device 71).

According to the above configuration, if the second game round operation is executed at the timing when the first condition is satisfied, the first game round operation accompanying the first condition is executed for the second game round during the execution. It can be ended at the same timing as the operation, or can be ended at the timing when the second game rounding operation being executed is scheduled to be completed. As a result, in a gaming machine in which a plurality of gaming rotation operations having different execution conditions are performed, for example, in the case of a configuration in which the gaming state is changed or a privilege is given after the gaming rotation operation is completed, any of the gaming rotations is performed. It becomes difficult to understand whether the game state has changed or the privilege has been granted based on the action (which condition is satisfied). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the result of each of the plurality of game rotation movements, and it is possible to diversify the production.

Feature E3. When the first condition is satisfied in a situation where the second game rounding operation is being executed, a grasping means (second implementation) for grasping the remaining operation continuation period of the second game rounding operation being executed. A function of executing the processing of step S3212, step S3213, and step S3216 by the main control device 71 in the modified example of the embodiment) is provided.
In the determination means, when the first condition is satisfied in the situation where the second gaming operation is executed, the remaining operation continuation period of the second gaming operation grasped by the grasping means is set in advance. If it is shorter than the predetermined period, the means for determining the operation continuation period of the first game rounding operation accompanying the satisfaction of the first condition as a predetermined predetermined period (variable display time corresponding to the support mode) ( The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, which comprises a function of executing the processes of steps S33302 and S3307 by the main control device 71 in the modified example of the second embodiment).

According to the above configuration, even if the second gaming operation is executed at the timing when the first condition is satisfied, the remaining operation continuation period of the second gaming operation is shorter than the predetermined period. In addition, the remaining operation continuation period is not set as the operation continuation period of the first game round operation, but the operation continuation period of the first game round operation is set as a predetermined predetermined period, and the first game round operation is performed. Is executed. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience that the period for performing the first game rounding operation is too short and it becomes difficult for the player to confirm the first game rounding operation.

Feature E4. When the first condition is satisfied in a situation where the second game rounding operation is being executed, a grasping means (second implementation) for grasping the remaining operation continuation period of the second game rounding operation being executed. A function of executing the processing of step S3405 and step S3406 by the main control device 71 in the modified example of the embodiment) is provided.
In the determination means, when the first condition is satisfied in the situation where the second gaming operation is executed, the remaining operation continuation period of the second gaming operation grasped by the grasping means is set in advance. If it is longer than the predetermined period, the means for determining the operation continuation period of the first game rounding operation accompanying the satisfaction of the first condition as a predetermined predetermined period (variable display time corresponding to the support mode) ( The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that it includes a function of executing the process of step S3307 by the main control device 71 in the modified example of the second embodiment).

According to the above configuration, even if the second gaming operation is executed at the timing when the first condition is satisfied, the remaining operation continuation period of the second gaming operation is longer than a predetermined period. In the first game round operation, the operation continuation period of the first game round operation is not set as the remaining operation continuation period, but the operation continuation period of the first game round operation is set as a predetermined predetermined period. Is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress an event in which the period for performing the first game rounding operation is too long and the first game rounding operation is continued endlessly.

Feature E5. If the second gaming rotation operation is not performed when the first condition is satisfied, the determination means accompanies the establishment of the first condition for a predetermined predetermined period (variable display time corresponding to the support mode). Means for determining the operation continuation period of the first game rounding operation (function for executing the processes of step S2002, step S2006 and step S2008 by the main control device 71 in the second embodiment, main control in the third embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, which comprises a function of executing the processing of step S2502, step S2508, and step S2510 by the apparatus 71).

According to the above configuration, the second game rounding operation is not performed when the first condition is satisfied, the operation continuation period of the first game rounding operation is not determined, and the first game rounding operation is not performed. It is possible to avoid such inconveniences.

Feature E6. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of the second condition (a function of executing the acquisition process of reserved information on the normal drawing side in the third embodiment) and
An acquisition information storage means (normal figure holding area 206) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers, and
Equipped with
The second game round execution means executes the second game round execution operation according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The determining means determines the operation continuation period of the first gaming rounding operation accompanying the fulfillment of the first condition, according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means when the first condition is satisfied. The description according to any one of the features E1 to E5, which comprises a special determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2503 to S2507 and step S2510 by the main control device 71 in the third embodiment). Amusement machine.

According to the above configuration, if there is special information in which the second game rounding operation is performed, the operation duration of the first game rounding operation is determined in consideration of the special information. As a result, not only the second game rounding operation executed when the first condition is satisfied, but also the second game rounding operation corresponding to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means when the first condition is satisfied. It is possible to associate with the first game rounding operation. Therefore, the range of choices for producing the association can be expanded, and the game can be diversified.

Feature E7. When the first condition is satisfied in a situation where the second game rounding operation is being executed, a grasping means (third implementation) for grasping the remaining operation continuation period of the second game rounding operation being executed. It is provided with a function of executing the processes of steps S2503 to S2507 by the main control device 71 in the embodiment).
When the first condition is satisfied in a situation where the second gaming operation is being executed, the special determining means has the remaining operation continuation period of the second gaming operation grasped by the grasping means. On the other hand, the period obtained by adding the operation continuation period of the second game round operation corresponding to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is added to the period for the first game round when the first condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature E6, which comprises means for determining the operation continuation period of the operation (a function of executing the process of step S2510 by the main control device 71 in the third embodiment).

According to the above configuration, the timing at which the second game round operation executed when the first condition is satisfied and the second game round operation corresponding to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means are completed, and the first game. It is possible to match the timing at which the diversion operation ends. As a result, in a gaming machine in which a plurality of gaming rotation operations are performed, for example, if the gaming state is changed or a privilege is given after the gaming rotation operation is completed, any of the gaming rotation operations (any of the gaming rotation operations). It becomes difficult to understand whether the game state has changed or the privilege has been granted based on the condition). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the result of each of the plurality of game rotation movements, and it is possible to diversify the production.

Feature E8. When the first condition is satisfied in a situation where the second game rounding operation is being executed, a grasping means (third implementation) for grasping the remaining operation continuation period of the second game rounding operation being executed. The function of executing the processes of steps S2503 to S2507 by the main control device 71 in the embodiment) and
A selection means for selecting one special information from the special information stored in the acquired information storage means (a function of executing the process of 2505 by the main control device 71 in the third embodiment) and
Equipped with
When the first condition is satisfied in a situation where the second gaming operation is being executed, the special determining means has the remaining operation continuation period of the second gaming operation grasped by the grasping means. On the other hand, the operation continuation period of the second gaming operation corresponding to the special information selected by the selection means and the second gaming operation executed before the selected special information. Means for determining the operation correspondence period of the corresponding special information and the addition period as the operation continuation period of the first game rounding operation accompanying the establishment of the first condition (according to the main control device 71 in the third embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature E6 or feature E7, which comprises a function of executing the processes of steps S2506 to S2507 and step S2509).

According to the above configuration, in a situation where a plurality of special information is stored, a timing at which the second game rounding operation of one special information selected by the selection means ends and a timing at which the first game rounding operation ends. , Can be matched. As a result, in the gaming machine of feature E7, the range of effect selection is widened, and the gaming is diversified.

Feature E9. It is equipped with a first entry section (special winning opening 52 and operating opening 34) and a second entry section (through gates 35A, 35B) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
The first condition is satisfied based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry portion.
The second condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry portion.
The first ball entry section is described in any one of features E1 to E8, wherein the first ball entry section is provided at a position where a game ball that has entered the second ball entry section can enter the game area. Pachinko machine.

According to the above configuration, a game ball flowing down the game area may enter the second entry section, and the game ball may further enter the first entry section. Therefore, when the first condition is further satisfied after the second condition is satisfied, the first game rounding operation is started after the second gaming rounding operation is started. As described in the feature E1, the operation duration of the first game rounding motion is determined according to the operating state of the second game rounding motion. Therefore, if this configuration is adopted for the feature E1, the second ball entry portion is adopted. It is possible to change the operation duration of the first game rounding operation according to the length of the flow path of the game ball from to the first ball entry portion. This makes it possible to design an effect by associating the operation duration of a plurality of game rotation operations with the flow path of the game ball, expanding the range of the effect design and increasing the attention of the game. can.

Feature E10. A game ball provided in a ball passage area (game ball passage area R) through which a game ball can pass from the second ball entry section to the first ball entry section, and the game ball entered into the second ball entry section. A distribution means for distributing the ball into either a first passage (first passage 51a) that allows the ball to enter the first ball entry portion or a second passage (second passage 51b) that does not allow the ball to enter the first ball entry portion. (Distribution plate 54) and
A grasping means for grasping which passage of the first passage or the second passage the distribution means distributes the game ball (steps S1710 to S1714 by the main control device 71 in the second and third embodiments). (Function to execute the processing of steps S2311 to S2314) and
The gaming machine according to the feature E9, which is characterized by having.

According to the above configuration, whether or not a game ball that has entered the second entry section is allowed to enter the first entry section can be changed by the distribution means, and this can be grasped by the grasping means. be able to. That is, when the second condition is satisfied, that is, when the second game rounding operation is started, it is possible to grasp whether or not the first condition is satisfied and the first game rounding operation is performed thereafter. .. As a result, in a configuration in which the operation continuation period of the first game round operation is determined according to the operation status of the second game round operation, the operation continuation period of the second game round operation is set in advance (the first game round operation). It is possible to adjust before determining the operation duration of. Therefore, it is possible to suitably carry out the first game rounding operation and the second game rounding operation, respectively.

Feature E11. A transition determination means (a special figure change start process by the main control device 71) for executing a transition determination as to whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the satisfaction of the first condition. Function to execute) and
Based on the fact that the determination result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition correspondence result corresponding to the transition of the gaming state to the special gaming state, the gaming state after the end of the first game rotation operation. A game state transition means (a function of executing processing during special figure determination by the main control device 71) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E10.

According to the above configuration, when the first condition is satisfied, a transition determination is made as to whether or not to transition to the special gaming state, and if the determination result of the transition determination is the transition correspondence result, the first game rounding operation is performed. After the end of, it shifts to the special game state. Then, since the operation continuation period of the first game round operation is determined according to the operation status of the second game round operation, the transition timing to the special game state based on the satisfaction of the first condition is set for the second game round. It will be determined according to the operating status of the operation. As a result, it becomes possible to relate the operation state of the second game rounding operation to the point that the player is interested in the transition to the special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the operating state of the second game rounding operation.

Feature E12. Both the first game rounding operation and the second gaming rounding operation are performed by the predetermined notification means.
The first game round execution means ends the first game round operation as a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the shift determination by the shift determination means.
Based on the fact that the first condition is satisfied in the situation where the second gaming round operation is being performed, the second gaming rounding operation being executed by the notification means is referred to as the first gaming rounding operation. The gaming machine according to feature E11, which comprises a replacement means for replacement (a function of executing the process of step S2113 by the sound / light control device 300 in the second embodiment).

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a plurality of game rotation operations are performed, each game rotation operation is performed by a common notification means rather than by a separate notification means, so that each game rotation operation is performed. Operations may overlap. In particular, since the first game rounding motion reflects the determination of transition to the special gaming state, the content greatly affects the profit for the player. Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied in the situation where the second game rounding operation is performed, the second game rounding operation being executed by the replacement means is set as the first game rounding operation. Information related to the profit can be promptly notified to the player.

Feature E13. A transition determination means (a special figure change start process by the main control device 71) for executing a transition determination as to whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the satisfaction of the first condition. Function to execute) and
Based on the fact that the determination result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition correspondence result corresponding to the transition of the gaming state to the special gaming state, the gaming state after the end of the first game rotation operation. A game state transition means (a function of executing processing during special figure determination by the main control device 71) and
Equipped with
Both the first game rounding operation and the second gaming rounding operation are performed by the predetermined notification means.
The first game round execution means ends the first game round operation as a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the shift determination by the shift determination means.
Based on the establishment of the second condition, a grasping means for grasping whether or not the first condition is satisfied thereafter (steps S1710 to S1714 and steps S2311 to the main control device 71 in the second and third embodiments). A function to execute the process of step S2314) is provided.
The second game round execution means corresponds to the determination result of the transition determination by the transition determination means when it is determined by the grasping means that the first condition is subsequently satisfied based on the establishment of the second condition. Means for executing the second gaming rotation operation accompanying the fulfillment of the second condition so as to result in a stop (a function of executing the processing of steps S1812 and S2413 by the main control device 71 in the second and third embodiments). ), The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E11.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a plurality of game rotation operations are performed, each game rotation operation is performed by a common notification means rather than by a separate notification means, so that each game rotation operation is performed. Operations may overlap. In particular, since the first game rounding motion reflects the determination of transition to the special gaming state, the content greatly affects the profit for the player. Therefore, when it is grasped by the grasping means that the first condition is satisfied after that, the transition determination is not made at the time when the grasping means grasps (the time when the second condition is satisfied), but the decision is made first. In addition, the second game rounding operation corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment accompanying the fulfillment of the first condition is performed. This makes it possible to promptly notify information related to the interests of the player.

Feature E14. The stop result of the second game round operation executed by the second game round execution means is a stop result when the determination result of the shift determination by the shift determination means is the shift correspondence result. The gaming machine according to the feature E13.

According to the above configuration, the second game round execution means executes the second game round execution operation so as to be a stop result of the transition correspondence result. In this case, although there is a possibility that the result of the transition determination performed by the transition determination means that is performed thereafter may not be the transition correspondence result, the player expects that it is the transition correspondence result, and pays attention to the game rotation operation. It is possible to increase the degree.

Feature E15. The gaming machine according to feature E14, wherein the winning probability of the transition determination by the transition determination means is 50% or more.

According to the above configuration, since 50% or more of the transition correspondence results are the transition correspondence results, when the second game round execution means executes the second game round operation, the transition is performed regardless of the transition judgment of the transition correspondence result. Even if the second game rounding operation is started so that the response result is stopped, it is possible to reduce the events that do not result in the transition response result thereafter. As a result, although the stop result of the second game rounding operation corresponds to the transition correspondence result, the determination result of the transition determination means does not actually shift to the special gaming state unlike the transition correspondence result. Events can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the confusion and disappointment given to the player.

The higher the probability of winning the transition determination, the better, and more preferably 100%.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and grants a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 24 ... Game board, 27 ... Game ball launch mechanism, 28 ... Launch operation device, 32 ... Special electric winning device, 32a ... Large winning opening, 33 ... Special accessory, 33a ... Ball passage opening, 35A ... Through Gate, 35c ... Detection sensor, 35d ... General electric accessory, 42 ... Symbol display device, 42a ... Display screen, 51a ... First passage, 51b ... Second passage, 54 ... Distribution plate, 55 ... Rotating shaft, 56 ... Tapered part, 60 ... Cover member, 81 ... Main control board, 82 ... MPU, 102 ... Special figure holding area, 106 ... Normal drawing holding area, 107 ... Execution area, 204 ... Second special drawing holding area, 206 ... Normal Figure Reservation area, 224 ... Game board, 253 ... Second special winning opening, 300 ... Sound light control device, 302 ... MPU, 400 ... Display control device, 402 ... MPU, A ... Substantial hit result, B ... Substantial hit result, PE ... Game area.

Claims (1)

A launching means that launches a game ball toward the game area by being operated by the player,
An entry part where a game ball launched by the launching means and flowing down the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a game ball enters the ball entry portion, and
An acquisition information storage means that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number, which is predetermined.
For each special information stored in the acquired information storage means, a grant determination is sequentially made as to whether or not the grant correspondence result corresponds to the granting of the first privilege to the player, and the determination result is the grant correspondence. If it is the result, the privilege granting means for granting the first privilege and the privilege granting means
In a gaming machine equipped with
A means for counting the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion ,
By operating the launching means in a specific manner in which the ball can enter the ball entry portion regardless of the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the first privilege is different from the first privilege. 2 The first means that can execute the first notification that the privilege can be granted, and
When the ball enters the ball entry portion due to the operation of the launching means in the specific mode, the case where the operation of the launching means which is the specific mode is not continued is better than the case where the operation is continued. A second means capable of performing a second notification that the situation can be advantageous,
Equipped with
The second means can execute the second notification when a ball enters the ball entry portion in a situation where the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the predetermined number. A gaming machine featuring.

Images